Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
siemens.com/tip-cs
Navigation tips
Contents
Intro
duction
1
2
Navigation bar
On every page you will find a
navigation bar.
Click on the chapter title/number in
the navigation bar to move to the
start page of the relevant chapter.
Click on Contents at the top to view
the contents page.
21
25
27
29
Scroll horizontally to
switch between
individual pages
Con
tents
Editorial
Intro
duction
1
2
The planning of electric power distribution in buildings and infrastructure facilities is subject to
constant transformation. The search for an assignment-compliant, dependable solution should fulfil
those usual requirements placed on cost optimisation, efficiency, and time needs. At the same time,
technical development innovations and findings from the practical world are constantly seeping into
the planning process. Our books on electric power distribution are intended to support you in your
work as a designer and to provide you with a continuously updated and dependable instrument.
Various volumes under the application manual term have been compiled over time. To introduce a
form of structuring into the process, we will in future distinguish between planning and application
manuals.
The specific requirements of infrastructure facilities of individual industries and building types on
electric power distribution is worked on in the application manuals. Perhaps you have already made
acquaintances with the two editions on high-rise buildings and data centres. This is the series we
intend to continue with at intervals. We would be glad to take up any suggestions you may have here.
The planning manuals concern themselves more with those subjects generally used in planning
electric power distribution. They are oriented to that fundamental know-how which is at the basis
of all planning work. To this end, we are launching a new series which, initially, will consist of two
volumes.
This newly designed first volume, Planning of Electric Power Distribution Technical Principles,
looks, in particular, at the general requirements and characteristics which are of interest in planning
electric power distribution. The follow-up, Planning of Electric Power Distribution Products and
Systems, is being prepared. It will feature those technical details and descriptions of specific products
and systems so as to fulfil the requirements specified in this volume.
To be in a position in future to handle appropriate, up-to-the-minute subjects, we would be
particularly thankful to you as our technically interested readers for any information here. Please
send us an e-mail to: consultant-support.tip@siemens.com with reference to: TIP Planning Manuals.
Detlef Lucius
Vice President
Consultant Support for Totally Integrated Power
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Con
tents
Contents
Intro
duction
1
2
Integrated Planning Cost Reduction
3
4
5
10
1.1
10
1.2
10
1.3
Design/Performance Specification
1.4
1.5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
98
99
12
7.1
13
7.2 Fuses
16
112
116
7.3
Switchgear Assemblies
117
7.4
Miniature Circuit-breaker
129
134
147
148
18
164
21
8.1
Medium-Voltage Switchgear
165
25
8.2
175
2.5
27
8.3
Medium-Voltage Protection
185
17
2.2
9 Transformers
194
29
9.1
Electrical Design
194
30
9.2
197
9.3
199
32
9.4
201
36
9.5
44
Network Configurations
45
4.2
47
4.3
50
4.4
51
60
68
Quality of Supply
5.1
Voltage Quality
69
5.2
Electromagnetic Compatibility
75
5.3
78
5.4
84
17
13
92
203
204
9.7
Transformer Operation
206
9.8
Transformer Room
209
214
220
225
225
228
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
11
234
17 Appendix
346
236
346
347
237
357
240
17.4 Bibliography
361
362
Imprint
366
12
248
248
249
256
258
13
262
263
266
14
278
Energy Management
279
281
284
284
286
291
292
296
297
298
299
299
16
302
302
305
305
312
318
329
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
4
Introduction
Integrated Planning Cost Reduction
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Increasingly greater demands are placed on modern buildings. As early as in the planning stage, demands for a high
level of safety, flexibility throughout the entire life cycle, a
low level of environmental pollution, the integration of
renewable energies and low costs must be taken into
account in order to exploit the full potential of economic
efficiencies and fulfilling technical demands. A special
challenge is the coordination of the individual installations.
Basically, the main installations are heating, ventilation, air
conditioning and refrigeration, fire protection, protection
against intrusion, building control system and electric
power distribution. With innovative planning, the requirements are not simply broken down to the individual installations, but have to be coordinated.
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
Feed-in
10
Power distribution
11
Short-circuit/overload protection
Power management
12
ology
Building techn
13
Process and ma
14
Planning,
ustry
nufacturing ind
ems
ts and syst
g, produc
configurin
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power the long-term power distribution as foundations for Totally Integrated Automation and
Totally Building Solutions
Con
tents
Intro
duction
of the different systems makes it possible to attain maximum process efficiency and reliability. At the same time,
costs weighing on building investors, users, and operators
can be reduced by exploiting synergies.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
For the purpose of integrated planning, a building is regarded as an entity, functionality is defined in line with the
processes running without limiting it to the individual
installations as used to be done in traditional approaches.
To this end it is necessary to define specifications comprehensively as early as in the planning stage. This is the only
way to implement a solution with optimally matched
systems and components. A seamless technical integration
16
17
7
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
8
Chapter 1
General Planning Considerations
1.1 The Planners Tasks
1.2 Contents of the Individual
ProjectPhases
1.3 Design/Performance Specification
1.4 Some Basic Considerations
on Power Distribution
1.5 Standards, Standardisation
Bodies, and Guidelines
10
10
12
13
14
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
10
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Preliminary planning:
Testing and model testing
Plant optimisation with regard to energy
consumption and emission of pollutants
Preparation of optimised energy concepts
4
5
Concept planning:
Preparation of data for the planning of third parties
Detailed profitability verification
Operating cost calculations
Detailed comparison of pollutant emissions
Drawing up the technical part of a room finishing
schedule (Raumbuch)
6
7
Fig. 1/1 shows schematically which focal points of planning are covered by TIP.
8
9
Energy Management/
Energy Transparency
Operation &
Monitoring
Load
management
Load curves
Forecast
Maintenance
Substation
Distribution
Maintenance
task
Status
reporting/
failure
management
Protocols
Power
Quality
DATE:
EMPLOYEE
COST CENTER
PAY PERIOD BEGINNING
10
Cost center
DATE
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
TOTAL
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
TOTAL HOURS
DATE
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THUR
FRI
SUN
MON
TUE
WED
THUR
FRI
SAT
SUN
TOTAL
IN
OUT
U
I
cos o
P
W
IN
Hall 1
Distribution 3
Process/
industrial automation
OUT
OVERTIME
central ON
OFF
local ON
OFF
tripped
TOTAL HOURS
11
DATE
SAT
SUN
TOTAL
IN
OUT
Building
automation
IN
OUT
OVERTIME
TOTAL HOURS
Ethernet
Infeed II
PROCESS FIELD
12
Industrial
Renewables
Transformer
13
110 kV
14
Network dimensioning
with SIMARIS design
15
Visualisation of device
characteristics with SIMARIS curves
16
TIP04_13_001_EN
17
Fig. 1/1: Totally Integrated Power integrated solutions for electrical power distribution
11
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1.3 Design/Performance
Specification
The design specification and the performance specification are important aids in the first phases.
Design specification
The design or product specification describes the What?
and For which purpose? and outlines the basic requirements. It is a rough target setting of the contract for the
contractor.
It specifies the scope of requirements defined by the
contract awarding party as regards the deliveries and
services to be performed by the contractor within the
scope of the contract
It describes the direct requirements and the desires
placed in a planned project or product from the user's
point of view
It serves as a basis for the invitation to tender, the
tender or quotation, and the contract
Requirements shall be quantifiable and verifiable
The design specification is drawn up by the (external or
in-house) awarding party, and it is addressed to the
contractors
In software development, the design specification
constitutes the result of the planning phase and is
usually worked out by the developers as a preliminary
stage to the performance specification
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Usually, each of the requirements of the design specification can be assigned to one or more services defined in
the performance specification. This also illustrates the
order of the two documents in the development process:
A requirement is fulfilled, when the corresponding feature is implemented.
When a design or performance specification is drawn up,
it must be considered that subordinate targets such as
investment, losses, reliability, quality, and much more
may mutually influence one another. Listing up such
conflicting relations and weighing them in the project
context will foster planning decisions and hence the
focus that is placed on the design and performance
specification.
Weighing in the context of design or performance spec
ification must be based on different questions posed.
Tab. 1/1 shows a simple correlation matrix in which the
competing situation of individual sub-targets is assessed.
For example, sub-target 2 Low line losses is strongly
influenced by sub-target 1 Cost of investment
whereas sub-target 4 High reliability of supply
hasnoimmediate interrelation with line losses.
Performance Specification
The performance or feature specification represents the
target concept and is technically detailed so far that it can
act as the basis for a technical specification.
It is a detailed description of a service to be performed,
for example, the erection of a technical plant, the construction of a tool, or the creation of a computer program
11
12
13
Subgoals
14
15
16
17
Ease of operation
12
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
13
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Regional
Amerika
PAS
Europa
CENELEC
Australien
Asien
Afrika
National
USA: ANSI
CA: SCC
BR: COBEI
D: DINVDE
I: CEI
F: UTE
GB: BS
AUS: SA
NZ: SNZ
CN: SAC
IND: BIS
J: JISC
SA: SABS
11
12
ANSI
BIS
BS
British Standards
13
14
15
16
17
CEI
COBEI
DINVDE
EN
European Norm
IEC
JISC
PAS
SA
Standards Australia
SABS
SAC
SCC
SNZ
14
Chapter 2
Basics for Drafting Electrical
PowerDistribution Systems
2.1 Requirements to Electrical Power
Systems in Buildings
2.2 Estimate of Power Demand
2.3 Estimation of a Concrete Value forthe
Power Demand from theGiven Margins
2.4 Operating Voltages in Supply and
Distribution Grids
2.5 Type of Power Supply
2.6 Central or Distributed Installation
of Low-voltage Supply
2.7 Network Configurations
2.8 Power Supply Systems according
to their Type of Connection to Earth
17
18
21
25
27
29
30
32
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Electrical power distribution requires integrated solutions.
Totally Integrated Power (TIP) provides support for working
out suitable solutions. This comprises software tools and
support for planning and configuring as well as a perfectly
harmonized, complete portfolio of products and systems
for integrated power distribution, ranging from the
medium-voltage switchgear to the final circuit. With TIP
Siemens renders support to meet requirements such as:
Simplification of operational management by a trans
parent, simple network topology
Low power losses, for example by medium-voltage-side
power transmission to the load centres
High reliability of supply and operational safety of the
installations, even in the event of individual equipment
failures (redundant supply, selectivity of the power
system protection, and high availability)
Easy adaptation to changing load and operational
conditions
Low operating costs thanks to maintenance-friendly
equipment
Sufficient transmission capacity of the equipment under
normal operating conditions as well as in fault conditions
to be handled
Good quality of the power supply, meaning few voltage
changes due to load fluctuations with sufficient voltage
symmetry and few harmonic distortions in the voltage
Observance of valid IEC/EN/VDE regulations as well as
project-related regulations for special installations
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Qualified planning of a power supply concept which considers the above-mentioned aspects is the key to the efficiency of electric power supply. Power supply concepts
must always be assessed in the context of their framework
parameters and project goals.
Siemens TIP supports engineering consultants in power system design and configuration (see Fig. 2/1) with a wide
range of services. Our TIP contact persons (please find their
contact data on the Internet at siemens.com/tip-cs/contact)
also make use of their personal contact to you to present
you planning tools such as SIMARIS design, SIMARIS project
and SIMARIS curves.
Besides planning manuals, Siemens also offers application
manuals, which describe the planning specification of
certain property types like high-rise buildings, hospitals or
data centres, and more network calculation tools like
SINCAL, or configuration tools such as Profix for
medium-voltage switchgear.
10
Compilation of boundary conditions
Influencing factors
11
12
Concept finding:
Analysis of the supply task
Selection of the network configuration
Selection of the type of power supply system
Definition of the technical features
Calculation:
Energy balance
Load flow (normal / fault)
Short-circuit currents
(uncontrolled / controlled)
Dimensioning:
Selection of equipment,
transformers, cables, protection
and switching devices, etc.
Requirements according selectivity
and back-up protection
Equipment data
13
14
15
16
Electrical data
Dimensions etc.
Selectivity tables
Selectivity limit tables
Characteristic curves, setting data, etc.
etc.
TIP04_13_002_EN
17
Fig. 2/1: Tasks of network planning and configuration
16
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Investment
Installation
2
3
4
5
6
Operation
Costs of implementation
Minimum
Maximum
Irrelevant
Implementation time
Minimum
Minimum
Irrelevant
Technology
Cost-effective
Easy installation
Flexible operation
Minimum
Maximum
Irrelevant
Period of use
Maximum
Irrelevant
Maximum
Fire load
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Minimum
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Minimum
7
8
9
Type of use
Residential areas
Offices
Server rooms
Features
Requirements
Consequences
Back-up protection
Mandatory RCCB
Choked compensation
Generator feed-in
Life-preserving machinery
IT system
Communication facilities
(network)
Medical locations
Industrial locations
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Tab. 2/2: Examples for various areas of use and their impact on electric grids and equipment
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
17
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
Average power
demand 1)
Building use
Simultaneity
factor 2)
g
in W/m2
5
6
7
8
300500
2550
Library
2040
0.6
300450
2040
Office
3050
0.6
250400
1740
Shopping centre
3060
0.6
150300
1235
Hotel
3060
0.6
200450
1035
Department store
3060
0.8
200350
2045
50250
0.6
300600
1850
20120
0.6
200500
1040
220
0.6
50120
318
5001,500
0.6
150200
1020
180350
1835
300450
2040
1030
0.4
10
1030
0.4
Museum
6080
0.6
Parking garage
310
0.6
100200
715
Production plant
3080
0.6
100200
1040
1252,000 3)
0.40.9 3)
3604,500 3)
602,200 3)
1030
0.6
200400
1530
Data centre 3)
School
Gym hall
Stadium (40,000 80,000 seats)
Old peoples home
14
15
in /m3
0.6
13
in /m3
4070
12
Bank
Cold store
11
Average building
cost per walled-in
area
1530
0.6
150300
825
70140 **)
0.6
3,0005,000 **)
3070 **)
1530
0.6
200400
1025
50100
520
250500
0.6
Laboratory/Research
100200
0.6
100200
0.4
Rubber industry
300500
0.6
6001,000
0.8
0.6
1) The
16
2)
values specified here are guidelines for demand estimation and cannot substitute precise power demand analysis.
The simultaneity factor is a guideline for preliminary planning and must be adapted for individual projects.
data centres, Tab. 2/5 and its associated explanations show the boundary conditions and simple calculations for the given estimated values and their wide
margins.
3) For
*)
17
Per bed approx. 8004,000 W; **) Per seat; ***) Power demand strongly process-dependent
Tab. 2/3: Average power demand of buildings according to their type of use
18
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Functional area/
building area
Average power
demand 1)
in W/m2
Simultaneity
factor 2)
g
Functional area/
building area
Hallway/anteroom, lobby
515
0.3
Building installations
Staircase
515
0.3
Escalator
0.5
Equipment, general
515
0.3
Lift
0.3
Foyer
1030
Sanitary systems
0.5
1020
Sprinklers
0.1
Recreation room/kitchenette
2050
0.3
Heating
0.8
Toilet areas
515
Air conditioning
0.8
Travel centre
6080
0.8
0.7
Office areas
2040
0.8
Refrigeration
0.7
Press/bookshop
80120
0.8
Flower shop
80120
0.8
Bakery/butcher
250350
0.8
Fruit/vegetables
80120
0.8
150250
0.8
Snack bar
180220
0.8
Diner/restaurant
180400
0.8
65100
Tobacco shop
80120
0.8
130150
Hairdresser
220280
0.8
700950
0.7
515
0.3
0.7
Photovoltaics 3)
(max. output of the
modules)
Dry-cleaners/laundry
Storage area
Kitchens
200400
Simultaneity
factor 2)
g
2
3
4
5
6
Functional area/
building area
Average power
demand 1)
in W/m2
6070
100110
10
60
100130
11
1)
The values specified here are guidelines for demand estimation and cannot substitute precise power demand analysis.
The simultaneity factor is a guideline for preliminary planning and must be adapted for individual projects. When dimensioning consumers in the safety power
supply system (SPS), their simultaneity factor must be considered separately (empirical value: g 0.8 for SPS busbar).
3) Average usable sun radiation in Germany per day 2.75kWh/m2
2)
12
back to page 18
13
2.2.1 Special Consideration of the Cost
Situation for a Data Centre
For a data centre, there are a number of factors influencing, among other things, the specific power demand.
Important aspects which result in a wide bandwidth of the
estimations of power demand, simultaneity factor and
specific costs are as follows:
Differentiation between a self-contained building (data
centre) or the ICT areas in a building
Different technologies for air conditioning and power
supply influence space requirements and energy efficiency
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
14
15
16
17
19
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
441 H
igh and Medium-voltage Systems (Switchgear,
Transformers)
442 Embedded Power Generating Systems
443 Low-voltage Switchgear
444 Low-voltage Installation Systems
445 Lighting Systems
446 Lightning Protection and Earthing Systems
The data centre simultaneity factor in Tab. 2/3 has a leeway
between 0.4 and 0.9 depending on the infrastructural
environment and the redundancy capacities. In case of a
(2n+1) redundancy (see chapter 5), the simultaneity factor
to be chosen will be between 0.4 (for n = 2) and 0.5 (for a
very large number n). Whereas without redundancy a very
high simultaneity factor is possible in the data centre.
7
8
Average building cost of walled-in area in /m3
10
D (C )
C (B)
B (A)
A (A+)
Offices
1.10
0.93
0.87
Auditoriums
1.06
0.94
0.89
Tier I
Tier II
Tier III
Tier IV
125
360
390
490
550
1,500
1,625
2,000
3,000
3,800
Educational facilities
(schools)
1.07
0.93
0.86
500
690
810
1,130
1,400
Hospitals
1.05
0.98
0.96
2,000
1,900
2,350
3,550
4,500
Hotels
1.07
0.95
0.90
Restaurants
1.04
0.96
0.92
1.08
0.95
0.91
DaC
11
Class
IT room
12
13
Tier I
Tier II
Tier III
Tier IV
125
60
75
130
160
1,500
740
940
1,500
1,900
500
240
300
470
620
2,000
900
1,100
1,750
2,300
DaC
14
IT room
15
* The cost share of embedded electricity generating sets (generators and UPS
systems) is approx. 70% and the cost share for high and medium-voltage
switchgear, low-voltage switchgear, low-voltage installation systems, lighting
systems and lightning protection, and earthing systems amounts to approx.
30% altogether.
16
17
20
18
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
page 21
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Specific power
in W/m2
ktot
0.0
1.0
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
3
4
0.0
1.0 0.0
kplc
1.0 0.0
kstruct
1.0 0.0
kcomf
1.0 0.0
kclim
1.0 0.0
ktech
1.0
kBA/TBM
Calibration factors
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
21
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
kstruct 1
kclim 1
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
0.4
0.4
14
0.2
0.2
0
15
0
1
2
3
4
100 2,000 m2 500 4,000 m2 2,000 8,000 m2 > 6,000 m2
16
17
22
very
low
low
very
average
high
high
Power demand for air conditioning
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Con
tents
Intro
duction
In the same way as for the technical characteristics, standard EN 15232 can be used for the building management
(see Tab. 2/9
2/9). However, note that energy efficiency classD
from EN15232 plays no role for the planning of BA/TBM
systems in new buildings. The advantage of our procedure
with scaled calibration factors is revealed here. Characterisation features can be adapted to the latest technology
through the scaling and the classification always defined
through one's own current experience.
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
Class
11
Energy efficiency
Highly energy-efficient devices and systems (low-friction
AC drives, EC fans, LEDs, transistor converters, etc.)
Efficiency class
Offices
1.0
0.57
0.26
Auditoriums
1.0
0.65
0.29
Educational facilities
(schools)
1.0
0.67
0.33
Hospitals
1.0
0.44
0.22
Hotels
1.0
0.59
0.29
Restaurants
1.0
0.67
0.33
1.0
0.53
0.24
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
23
Con
tents
Intro
duction
5
Class
6
A
7
8
9
10
11
12
23
13
14
15
16
17
24
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
1 Medium-voltage
2
2 High-voltage
16
3 Low-voltage
17
Fig. 2/5: Voltage levels between the power station and the consumer
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
25
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Dependent on the DSO, a direct connection of the customer to a transformer substation of the DSO (grid level 6
in Tab. 2/10) may be possible in case of a power demand of
more than 150kW (house connection with 250 A), and if a
connection to the grid above 300 or 400kW needs to be
created, a connection to the medium-voltage level (grid
level 5) may be permitted. Often, a power factor cos is
also specified (Tab. 2/10).
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Grid level 1
Transmission grid
Grid level 2
Main substation
Grid level 3
Supra-regional distribution
grid
High voltage
Grid level 4
Main substation
Grid level 5
Medium voltage
Grid level 6
Transformer substation
Grid level 7
Low voltage
220/380 kV 3~,
HVDC up to 800kVDC
110kV 3~
10/20/30 kV 3~
230V 1~/400V 3~
Tab. 2/10: Grid level structure in the UCTE grid (UCTE Union for the Co-ordination of Transmission of Electricity)
26
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Since the circuits for SPS loads must be laid separately, their
placement inside the building is relevant for budget considerations. In Germany, certain statutory regulations and
specifications are additionally applicable, which demand
the functional endurance of cables and wires in case of fire.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The constellation depicted in Fig. 2/6 with the corresponding description given in Tab. 2/11 has proven itself in
infrastructure projects.
9
10
11
12
Uninterruptible power
supply (UPS)
13
Example
T1
T2
T3
G
UPS
TIP01_11_013_EN
Type
14
15
NPS
network
NPS consumer
ESPS
network
SPS consumer
16
UPS consumer
17
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
27
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Process definition /
task description
10
No
Yes
Consideration of all electricity
consumers contributing
to the process
11
12
Is manual
emergency operation possible
(maybe partially)?
13
Yes
No
14
No
Is a shorter
bridging time sufficient,
e.g. for a shutdown
process?
Yes
15
16
Consumers to SPS
No
Yes
Consumers via UPS
directly to NPS
Connect consumers
to UPS via SPS
17
Fig. 2/7: Flowchart for an estimation of NPS, SPS and UPS
28
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Consumers to NPS
TIP01_11_014_EN
Is a short
interruption of the power
supply permissible?
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Distributed power supply
11
PS8
T1
PS7
PS6
T2
T2
T1
T3
12
PS5
T4
PS4
T3
PS3
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS5
PS6
PS7
PS8
13
PS2
T4
PS1
Ik
Ik
kA
kA
14
u
%
u
%
15
Worse voltage stability
Higher power losses
Difficult compliance with the conditions for disconnection
from supply in acc. with IEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100-410)
16
TIP01_11_020_EN
17
Fig. 2/8: Comparison of supply variants with regard to short-circuit current Ik and voltage drop u
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
29
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
9
Radial network (spur network)
10
Main switchgear
Main switchgear
11
12
Station 1
Station 4
Station 1
Station 4
Station 2
Station 5
Station 2
Station 5
Station 3
Station 6
Station 3
Station 6
13
14
15
16
Feed-in
Feed-in
n.o.
TIP04_13_003_EN
17
Fig. 2/10: Radial and ringed network for the connection of distributed transformer load centre substations
30
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
31
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
TN system: In the TN system, one operating line is directly earthed; the exposed conductive parts in the electrical installation are connected
to this earthed point via protection conductors. Dependent on the arrangement of the protection (PE) and neutral (N) conductors,
three types are distinguished:
a) TNS system:
In the entire system, neutral (N)
and protection (PE) conductors
are laid separately.
Power
source
7
8
9
Power
source
Electrical installation
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Power
source
Electrical installation
PE
N
Power
source
Electrical installation
L1
L2
L3
N
L1
L2
L3
N
12
Electrical installation
L1
L2
L3
PEN
11
Power
source
Electrical installation
L1
L2
L3
PEN
10
c) TNCS system:
In a part of the system, the functions
of the neutral and protection conductor
are combined in one conductor (PEN).
b) TNC system:
In the entire system, the functions
of the neutral and protection conductor
are combined in one conductor (PEN).
2
RB
3
14
15
16
17
RA
RB
RA
1
Fig. 2/11: Systems according to the type of connection to earth in acc. with IEC60364-1 (VDE0100-100)
32
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
TIP01_11_019_EN
13
Con
tents
Intro
duction
TN-C
Characteristics
5
TN-S
2
IT system
2
TT system
3
EMC-friendly
10
11
3
4
TN-C/S
2
12
13
14
15
16
17
Tab. 2/12: Exemplary quality rating dependent on the power supply system according to its type of connection to earth
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
33
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
34
Totally Integrated Power Basics for Drafting Electrical Power Distribution Systems
Chapter 3
Power System Planning Modules
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
100% of the total power are drawn from the public grid,
whereof 10 to 30% are provided for the safety power
supply (SPS) and 5 to 20% for the uninterruptible power
supply (UPS). For medium-voltage supply, an SF6 gas-
insulated 8DJH medium-voltage switchgear, a SIVACON
low-voltage main distribution system with TN-S system,
and due to the room conditions GEAFOL cast-resin
transformers with reduced losses are assumed for the
modules.
6
7
The room conditions and the associated load requirements are essential for the basic concept. The flow diagram Fig. 3/1 shows, how a systematic analysis of the
boundary conditions and the different single decisions
lead to a a planning framework which helps the planner
find the right supply concept for his project.
The design proposals (Tab. 3/1) and the network planning
modules (Fig. 3/2 to Fig. 3/6) help building up the power
distribution system for typical building structures in an
easy and systematic way. The schematized solution
proposals can then be specifically extended and adjusted
for a project. When the preliminary planning stage has
been completed, the power system can easily be dimensioned and calculated with the aid of the SIMARIS design
planning tool. Up-to-date and detailed descriptions of
selected applications can be obtained on the Internet at
siemens.com/tip-cs/planningmanuals
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Module
Building
type
Wiring/
main route
Floors
Low-rise
building
1 supply
section
Cable
2,500m2
10,000m2
1,000
2,000kW
2 630kVA,
ukr=6%,
Ik30 kA
400kVA
(30%)
200kVA
(15%)
Low-rise
building
2 supply
sections
Busbar
2,500m2
2
10,000m2
> 2,000kW
2 800kVA,
ukr=6%,
Ik60 kA
730kVA
(30%)
400kVA
(15%)
High-rise
building
1 supply
section,
central
Busbar
10
1,000m2
10,000m2
1,800 kW
2 630kVA,
ukr=6%,
Ik30 kA
400kVA
(30%)
200kVA
(15%)
High-rise
building
1 supply
section,
transformers
at remote
location
1020
1,000m2
20,000m2
1,500 kW
2 (2 + 1)
630kVA,
ukr=6%,
Ik45 kA
800kVA
(30%)
400kVA
(15%)
High-rise
building
Distributed
supply
>20
1,000m2
20,000m2
2,000 kW
23
800kVA,
ukr=6%,
Ik60 kA
2
630kVA
(30%)
2
300kVA
(15%)
15
16
17
Supply
Cable
Busbar
Floor
area
Total area
36
Power
required
Transformer
module
Generator
UPS
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Functional areas:
Offices
Briefing rooms
Data centre
Canteen kitchen with casino
Heating/ventilation/air conditioning
Fire protection
Transport
Functional
building?
yes
Radial network
with partial
load reserve
TN-C-S system,
LVMD with central
earthing point
Low-rise building
High-rise building
no
A 2,000 m2?
yes
no
i < 5?
Tip:
Max. side length: a
Floor area A = a2
Height per floor: h
Number of floors: i
Max. number of floors
for one supply section:
i (100 m 2a) / h
Tip:
max = P/cos
Transformer selection:
max < 630 kVA: ukr 4 %
max 630 kVA: ukr 6 %
no
i 10?
i 20?
max 2 MVA?
no
10
yes
Central MV transfer:
distributed
transformers
LVMD
Central technical
equipment room,
transfer:
transformer LVMD
no
Distributed
MV transfer:
transformers
LVMD
11
12
Interlocked load
transfer with
4-pole devices
Low-rise building
Module 2
High-rise building
Module 3
yes
Tip:
Busbar trunking system if the focus
is on comfort requirements such as
good extendibility or easy assembly
as well as high operational safety
with EMC and small fire load
High-rise building
Module 4
14
High-rise building
Module 5
yes
yes
yes
no
Cables?
Busbars?
no
15
yes
TIP04_13_004_EN
Low-rise building
Module 1
13
16
17
37
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
HVAC
FF lifts
NPS1.2
8
1st floor
UPS4.2
UPS3.2
UPS2.2
2nd floor
SPS2.2
NPS2.2
UPS1.2
3rd floor
SPS3.2
NPS3.2
SPS4.2
4th floor
SPS1.2
NPS4.2
HVAC-SPS
10
LVMD
11
NPS
12
1
MS
13
SPS
G
3~
UPS
Basement
from DSO
14
NPS
PCO
FF
HVAC
MS
LVMD
SPS
UPS
DSO
z
15
16
17
Fig. 3/2: Module 1: Low-rise building, cable, one central supply section
38
TIP04_13_005_EN
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
HVAC
FF lifts
HVAC-SPS
NPS4.1
SPS4.1
UPS4.1
NPS4.2
SPS4.2
UPS4.2
SPS3.1
UPS3.1
NPS3.2
SPS3.2
UPS3.2
SPS2.1
UPS2.1
NPS2.2
SPS2.2
UPS2.2
SPS1.1
UPS1.1
NPS1.2
SPS1.2
UPS1.2
1st floor
NPS3.1
2nd floor
NPS2.1
3rd floor
NPS1.1
4th floor
4
5
6
7
8
9
LVMD
NPS
1
SPS
10
G
3~
MS
UPS
11
Basement
TIP04_13_006_EN
from DSO
NPS
FF
HVAC
MS
LVMD
SPS
UPS
DSO
z
12
13
14
15
16
17
Fig. 3/3: Module 2: Low-rise building, busbar, two central supply sections
39
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
FF lifts
Lifts
HVAC
HVAC-SPS
4
5
6
nth floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n1)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n2)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
2nd floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
7
8
9
1st floor
10
LVMD
11
NPS
1
12
SPS
2
z
MS
G
3~
UPS
Basement
from DSO
13
NPS
FD
FF
HVAC
MS
LVMD
SPS
UPS
DSO
z
14
15
16
17
Fig. 3/4: Module 3: Low-rise building, cable, one central supply section
40
TIP04_13_007_EN
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
Lifts
FF lifts
HVAC
HVAC-SPS
3
4
5
nth floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n1)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n2)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n3)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n4)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
5th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
4th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
3rd floor
Normal power supply
Floor distribution
boards
2nd floor
FF
Firefighters
HVAC Heating
Ventilation
Air conditioning
1st floor
MS
Medium-voltage
switchgear
LVMD Low-voltage main
LVMD
distribution
SPS
Safety power supply
UPS
Uninterruptible
power supply
DSO Distribution system
operator
z
Power monitoring
Basement
system
from DSO
NPS
FD
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
10
11
12
13
FD-UPS
14
NPS
1
2
z
MS
SPS
15
G
3~
UPS
16
TIP04_13_008_EN
17
Fig. 3/5: Module 4: High-rise building, cable, one supply section, transformers at remote location
41
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
Lifts
FF lifts
HVAC
HVAC-SPS
G
3~
UPS
4
5
6
nth floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n1)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n2)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
(n3)th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
7
8
9
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
(n4)th floor
10
5th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
11
4th floor
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
FD-NPS
FD-SPS
FD-UPS
NPS
FD
12
13
14
15
16
NPS
1
SPS
3
z
MS
from DSO
17
Fig. 3/6: Module 5: High-rise building, busbar, energy center and remote distribution
42
G
3~
UPS
TIP04_13_009_EN
Chapter 4
Planning of Medium-Voltage Grids
4.1 Components for the Configuration of
Medium-Voltage Grids
45
4.2 Medium-Voltage Power Supply Concepts47
4.3 Configuration of the Switchgear
50
4.4 Power System Protection Equipment
51
4.5 Connection of the Neutral Point in the
Medium-Voltage Cable Network
60
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
44
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Substations
13
1. If different transformer sizes are used in the substations, only a few standard types should be used.
14
15
16
17
45
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3. T
he economically sensible power range (influence on
voltage drop, power losses, power quality) for energy
transport in a low-voltage grid of 400 V is between
50kVA (approx. 72 A) and 250kVA (approx. 360 A;
several low-voltage cables are required in one direction). For a larger power range, the construction of a
new substation should be considered.
2
3
4. S
ubstations as multiple nodes make the search for a
fault more difficult. The load flow and the utilisation of
the cable may be unclear. This can even happen during
normal operation. Multiple nodes also make an extension of the network more difficult as there is often no
clear assignment to lines or rings. As far as possible,
the substation should be clearly assigned to a main
substation or main feed-in point.
4
5
6
5. F
or monitoring and control of the loads, communicative instrumentation should be installed on the MV or
LV side of the substation. In this way, the power management requirements according to the ISO50001
standard can be satisfied.
7
8
9
10
2. T
he type of switchgear whether single or double
busbar with longitudinal and/or transversal busbar
coupler depends on the network configurations
implemented in the network and the network mode of
operation during normal operation and when a fault
occurs.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1 Switching
46
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Medium-voltage main distribution
MVMD
TIP04_13_097_EN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
MVMD
TIP04_13_098_EN
17
47
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
= substation, such as
3
or
4
TIP04_13_099_EN
5
6
MVMD
9
10
11
12
TIP04_13_100_EN
13
14
15
16
MVMD
Reserve cable
Remote station
17
48
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
Feeder cable
Feeder cable
TIP04_13_101_EN
MVMD
Remote station
back to page 48
9
10
11
12
Remote station
13
Feeder cable
Feeder cable
MVMD-1
MVMD-2
TIP04_13_102_EN
14
15
16
Fig. 4/6: Network configuration: coupling of two main substation areas
17
back to page 48
49
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
Spurs
If the distribution transformers are connected directly in
the spur, then a single busbar is sufficient for the switchgear from which the spurs are routed. This switchgear is
usually a subordinate main feed-in point, i.e. not a transformer substation. Sectionalizing is recommended if a
large number of transformers is to be connected. Feed-in
from the upstream network as a ring or double spur
should then be connected separately to both halves of
the busbar.
7
8
9
Double spurs
10
11
12
Rings
If the medium-voltage grid is configured exclusively with
rings, a single busbar with BCL is sufficient. The rings
start on one side of the coupler and ends on the other
side. To increase the supply reliability, the busbar sections
can be separated spatially.
13
14
Lines
15
In a line network, the decision between a single or double busbar depends on the respective remote station. If
the remote station is a main substation, a single busbar
with BCL can also be used. However, a double busbar is
usually preferred. If two (possibly three) transformers
supply the double busbar in the main substation, then for
reasons of flexibility, a BCL with a BCT for each block is
recommended.
16
17
50
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Three current transformers for each feeder and, if required, three current transformers on the busbars as well
as the circuit-breaker are required for the connection and
operation of the protection devices. As, in contrast to the
measuring instruments, the protection relay should only
trip when a fault occurs, it is essential that it functions in
the few moments that it is required. To guarantee this,
the protection devices should have a live contact and trip
circuit monitoring that immediately signal readiness for
use or a fault to the control system. Without this equipment, a stationary test unit should be available in order
to regularly check the protection relay during operation.
During the test, an artificial fault is simulated to check
the response of the relay. At the same time, operation
should not be interrupted and therefore a trip during the
test must be suppressed.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
51
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
I> v 0.1 s
11
I>> 0.3 s
n.c.
13
n.c.
Station 1
12
Station 2
Feedin
Main station
n.c.
10
I>> 0.3 s
I> v 0.1 s
15
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
16
n.c.
Normally closed
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
TIP04_13_103_EN
n.c.
14
17
Fig. 4/7: Protection concept for a spur network
52
back to page 53
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
5
6
n.c.
7
8
I>> 0.6 s
n.c.
n.c.
11
I>> 0.3 s
12
13
14
I>> 0.3 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
10
n.c.
Substation
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
Main station
n.c.
Feedin
I>> 0.6 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
I>> 0.6 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
n.c.
Normally closed
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
TIP04_13_104_EN
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
15
16
17
Fig. 4/8: Protection concept for a double spur with directional time-overcurrent protection
53
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
I 0.0 s
I>> 0.6 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
13
14
I 0.0 s
I>> 0.3 s
n.c.
n.c.
Substation
I>> 0.3 s
I 0.0 s
15
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
16
n.c.
Normally closed
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
Communication link
17
Fig. 4/9: Protection concept for a double spur with cable differential protection
54
TIP04_13_105_EN
n.c.
I>> 0.6 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
12
I>> 0.6 s
n.c.
Feedin
11
Main station
n.c.
10
I 0.0 s
I>> 0.3 s
n.c.
n.c.
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
n.c.
8
n.c.
n.c.
back to page 53
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Open ring
Closed ring
2
3
4
5
n.c.
7
8
n.c.
Station 2
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Station 1
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
Feedin
Main station
n.c.
I>> 0.5 s
I> v 0.1 s
10
I>> 0.5 s
11
n.o.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
12
13
Normally closed
n.o.
Normally open
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
15
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
16
TIP04_13_106_EN
n.c.
14
n.c.
n.c.
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
Station 3
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
Station 4
I>> 0.3 s
n.c.
I>> 0.5 s
I> v 0.1 s
17
55
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
I>> 0.3 s
I> v 0.1 s
I> v 0.7 s
I> v 0.3 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Station 2
n.c.
Station 1
I> v 0.1 s
I> v 0.5 s
n.c.
I>> 0.9 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Feedin
Main station
10
11
I>> 1.3 s
n.c.
Normally closed
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
Fig. 4/11: Protection concept for a network with closed ring and time grading
56
n.c.
n.c.
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
Note: Addition of the grading times must be taken into account for faults at the start of the ring!
17
I> v 0.5 s
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
TIP04_13_107_EN
16
I> v 0.3 s
Station 3
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
Station 4
15
n.c.
I> v 0.7 s
n.c.
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
14
I>> 0.9 s
n.c.
I>> 1.3 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
13
n.c.
n.c.
12
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Station 2
n.c.
n.c.
Station 1
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
Station 3
Station 4
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
13
14
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
15
n.c.
Normally closed
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
backward
Short-circuit direction determination backward; this means in the direction of the busbar
forward
Short-circuit direction determination forward; this means in the direction of the cable
Blocking
Note: Consider adding grading times for faults at the start of the ring!
16
TIP04_13_108_EN
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
12
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
n.c.
I>> 0.3 s
backward
forward
n.c.
11
n.c.
I>> 0.9 s
I> v 0.1 s
10
I>> 0.9 s
n.c.
n.c.
Feedin
Main station
n.c.
I>> 0.9 s
I> v 0.1 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
17
Fig. 4/12: Protection concept for a network with closed ring and directional comparison protection
57
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
I>> 0.5 s
I> v 0.1 s
I 0.0 s
I 0.0 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Station 2
n.c.
I 0.0 s
I 0.0 s
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
16
n.c.
Normally closed
I> v
Short-circuit tripping in the forward direction; this means in the direction of the cable
Fig. 4/13: Protection concept for a network with closed ring and cable differential protection
58
n.c.
I 0.0 s
n.c.
I 0.0 s
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
Communication link
17
n.c.
n.c.
I 0.0 s
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
TIP04_13_109_EN
15
I 0.0 s
Station 3
n.c.
I 0.0 s
I>> 0.3 s
n.c.
I>> 0.5 s
I> v 0.1 s
14
n.c.
13
Station 4
n.c.
12
I>> 0.5 s
n.c.
Feedin
11
Main station
n.c.
10
I 0.0 s
I>> 0.3 s
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
Station 1
n.c.
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Busbar protection
Busbar faults within switchgear are very improbable
today because of the construction of the systems, but not
impossible. Usually such faults are detected by an upstream overcurrent-time protection and cleared. However, with this method the time until disconnection
depends on the grading times that result from the selective configuration of the network. In order to achieve
shorter breaking times for busbar faults and therefore
reduce the damage as much as possible, or to reach a
higher protection level, either a special busbar differential protection can be used or a reverse interlocking
through the directional overcurrent-time protection.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ring cable
Ring cable
n.c.
Ring cable
n.c.
Blocking busbar
Station x
10
Ring cable
I 0.0 s
I> r 0.1 s
backward
forward
I 0.0 s
I> r 0.1 s
backward
forward
I>> 0.1 s
backward
forward
I>> 0.1 s
backward
forward
n.c.
11
n.c.
Blocking busbar
12
Station x
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
13
n.c.
I> 0.6 s
I>> 0.1 s
14
Normally closed
I> r
Short-circuit tripping in the backward direction; this means in the direction of the busbar
backward
Short-circuit direction determination backward; this means in the direction of the busbar
forward
Short-circuit direction determination forward; this means in the direction of the cable
Blocking
Communication link
15
16
TIP04_13_110_EN
n.c.
17
59
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The setting of the overcurrent excitation for the protection of cable routes depends on:
The respective operating conditions
Current transformer transformation ratios
Maximum operating currents that occur
Minimum short-circuit currents that occur
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
ICE
C0
Earthfault compensation
(resonant NE: RNE)
11
1
2
3
12
Petersen
coil
IRest
C0
13
14
15
16
Resistance R
Ik1
1
2
3
C0
TIP04_13_010_EN
17
Fig. 4/15: Neutral earthing (NE) in a LV system
60
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Ie =
3 U C0
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
61
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
62
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
63
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
The zero phase-sequence impedance is mainly responsible for the additional attenuation of the earth-fault
current, and less so the positive-sequence impedance.
Whereas the positive-sequence impedance of cables is a
known value, which only depends on the type and conductor cross section, the zero phase-sequence impedance
is generally not a fixed value. Apart from the cable configuration it also depends on environmental influences.
In addition to the metal cable sheaths, other cables laid in
parallel, piping, busbars, etc. also have an effect. Any
cable steel tape armour or pliable wire armour also has
an effect. This reinforcement is magnetised by the currents in the conductor-earth loop (residual currents) so
that the zero phase-sequence impedance also becomes
dependent on the current.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Fig. 4/16 shows a summary of the most important electrical parameters for the various neutral-point connections.
The earth-fault currents are detected via the wiring of the
protection transformer using a Holmgreen connection
4/17 or by means of a cable-type current
(see Fig. 4/17a)
transformer (see Fig. 4/17b). The following is
recommended:
Operation with isolated neutral point
Use of the Holmgreen connection
if ICE sec>0.05 IN2
Use of the cable-type current transformer
if ICE sec<0.05 IN2
ICE sec capacitive earth-fault current of the galvanically
connected network in relation to the secondary
side of the current transformer
IN2 secondary side rated transformer current
Operation with earth-fault compensation
Always use the cable-type current transformer
Operation with low resistance neutral earthing
Use of the Holmgreen connection
if Ik1>0.1 IN1
Use of the cable-type current transformer
if Ik1<0.1 IN1
Ik1
IN1
13
14
15
16
17
64
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Neutral-point connection
ICE
Objective
Current at the
fault location
XD
1/(j C0)
I Rest
Resistance R
C0
1
3 C0
Z1
(d + jv)
Rigid
1
2
3
I k1
I k1
1
2
3
3
4
UnN
3 Ik1
<<
1
3 C0
20 100
IRest j C0
ICE j C0 3 UnN
Ik1 =
3 UnN
15
c
3 UnN
2 Z1 + Z0
10 A < ICE 35 A
IRest 60 A
Ik1 2 kA
<3h
<3h
<1s
<1s
Fault duration
Formula character
1
2
3
Petersen
Coil
C0
With impedance
Rating
Z0/Z1
Earth-fault compensation
1
2
3
Connection
TIP04_13_111_EN
back to page 64
9
10
Measurementbased detection of earth faults with
Holmgreen connection
L1
L2
L3
L1
L2
L3
7SJ61/62/63/64
12
I L1
7SJ61/62/63/64
I L2
IL1 >
I L2
IL1 >
I L3
IL2 >
I L3
IL2 >
3 I0
IL3 >
IL3 >
IE >
IEE >
13
TIP04_13_112_EN
I L1
11
14
15
3xI0
16
17
Fig. 4/17: Measurement-based detection of earth faults with a) Holmgreen connection b) cable-type current transformer
back to page 64
65
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The neutral-point resistance or the neutral-point reactance coil can be connected to the transformer in the
feeding main substation in most cases. Prerequisite is
that its zero phase-sequence impedance is sufficiently
small.
3
4
5
6
7
Three-leg core transformers in star-star connection without stabilising winding have a zero phase-sequence
impedance of approximately five to ten times the positive-sequence impedance. Because of the considerable
stray current running through the tank walls and the
associated heating, they cannot readily be used for the
system earthing.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
66
Chapter 5
Quality of Supply
5.1 Voltage Quality
5.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility
5.3 Availability and Redundancy
5.4 Reactive Power and Compensation
5.5 Protection Against Lightning Current
and Overvoltage
69
75
78
84
92
Con
tents
Intro
duction
5 Quality of Supply
All in all, the quality of electrical power supply is characterised by the voltage and service quality as well as its availability. The basic challenge in planning is to find the optimum of investment and operating costs on the one hand
and a risk estimation (frequency and effects of failures) on
the other hand (see Fig. 5/1).
2
3
Supply quality =
voltage quality + availability + service quality
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
Total cost
15
Cost of investment
and operation
16
17
68
TIP04_13_012_EN
Optimisation range
(dependent on the
specific cost situation)
TIP04_13_011_EN
Cost
13
200
Non-permissible range
(damage may occur)
Voltage
tolerance
ranges with
uninterrupted
function
140
100
80
70
40
0
0.001 0.01
110
90
Range possibly without function,
but also without damage
0.1
10
20
100
500
Fig. 5/2: ITIC curve for computer power supply units [4]
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Period under
consideration
Characteristic
Requirements
Measurement interval
System frequency
10 sec average
10 min average
1 week
2 h (flickermeter in acc.
with IEC61000-4-15)
1 week
Voltage unbalance
10 min average
1 week
1 week
Subharmonics
being discussed
Signal voltages
3 s average
1 day
Voltage dips
10 ms r.m.s. value
U10ms = 1 90% Urated
1 year
10 ms r.m.s. value
U10ms1% Urated
1 year
1 year
11
1 week
12
13
14
1 week
Transient overvoltage
< 6kV; s ms
15
16
1 year
10 ms r.m.s. value
U10ms>110% Urated
1 year
17
No data
Tab. 5/1: Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public grids in accordance with EN 50160
69
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Problem
f1
Voltage signal
2
3
f2
0.1
f1
Description
Cause
Frequency variation:
A frequency variation involves
variation in frequency above or
below the normally stable utility
frequency of 50 or 60Hz
Supply interruption:
Planned or accidental total loss of
power in a specific area;
momentary interruptions lasting
from half a second to 3 minutes
and long-term interruptions
lasting longer than 3 minutes
Equipment shutdown by
tripping due to undervoltage
Overheating and/or damage to
equipment due to overvoltage
Reduced efficiency or life of
electrical equipment
Flicker:
Impression of unsteadiness of
visual sensation induced by a
light stimulus the luminance or
spectral distribution of which
fluctuates with time
Intermittent loads
Motor starting of fans and
pumps
Arc furnaces
Welding plants
Transient
A transient is a sudden change in
voltage up to several thousand
volts. It may be of the impulsive or
oscillatory type (also termed
impulse, surge, or spike)
Notch:
This is a disturbance of opposite
polarity from the waveform
Hardware damage
Data loss
Burning of circuit boards and
power supply units
Noise:
This is an unwanted electrical
signal of high frequency from
other equipment
Harmonic:
Distortion of the pure sine wave
due to non-linear loads on the
power supply network
Noise is caused by
electromagnetic interference
from appliances, e.g.
microwave, radio, and TV
broadcast signals, or improper
earthing
Harmonic distortion is affected
by UPS systems, for instance
f1 > f2
4
Voltage signal
interruption
time up to
three minutes
0.1
0.2
time (s)
0.4
0.5
Voltage signal
0.1
0.2
time (s)
0.4
0.5
8
reduced voltage level
Voltage signal
0.1
0.2
time (s)
0.4
0.5
10
reduced voltage level
Voltage signal
11
12
13
0.1
0.2
with repetition
time (s)
0.4
0.5
Transients
14
Voltage signal
15
16
17
0.02
0.04
time (s)
0.08
0.1
70
Effect
back to page 69
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
EMC Environment Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public lowvoltage power supply systems
-4 VDE0839-2-4
EMC Environment Compatibility level in industrial plants for low-frequency conducted disturbances
-12 VDE0839-2-12
EMC Environment Compatibility levels for low-frequency conducted disturbances and signalling in public
medium-voltage power supply systems plants
EMC Limits Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current 16A per phase)
-3 VDE0838-3
EMC Limits Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems,
for equipment with rated current 16A per phase and not subject to conditional connection
-11 VDE0838-11
EMC Limits Limitation of voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems
Equipment with rated current 75A and subject to conditional connection
-12 VDE0838-12
EMC Limits Limits for harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with
input current >16A and 75A per phase
9
10
11
EMC Testing and measurement techniques General guide on harmonics and interharmonics measurements and
instrumentation, for power supply systems and equipment connected thereto
EMC Testing and measurement techniques Flickermeter Functional and design specifications
12
Tab. 5/3: Structure of the standard series IEC61000 (VDE0838, VDE0839, VDE0848)
13
Class 1
This class applies to protected supplies, having compatibility levels which are lower than for public grids. It refers to the
operation of equipment which responds in a very sensitive manner to disturbances in the power supply, for example the
electrical equipment of technical laboratories, certain automation and protection gear, certain data processing facilities etc.
14
Class 2
This class generally applies to points of common coupling (PCC) with the public grid and for in-plant points of coupling (IPC)
with industrial and other non-public power supply networks. The compatibility levels for this class are generally identical with
those applying to public grids. Therefore, components which were developed for use in public grids can also be employed in
this class for industrial environments.
15
Class 3
This class only applies to in-plant points of coupling (IPC) in industrial environments. For some disturbances, it comprises
higher compatibility levels than those in Class 2. This class should be considered, for example, if one of the following
conditions is true.
A major load share is fed by the power converters
Welding machines exist
Large motors are frequently started
Loads vary quickly
16
17
71
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
As a rule,
kU SA/SkV kU,perm.
kU
Level of voltage unbalance
kU,perm. Permissible level of voltage unbalance
SA Connected load as single-phase or two-phase load
SkV
Short-circuit power at the linking point
Uneven harmonics
No multiples
of 3
Order
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
72
Multiples
of 3
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Relative
voltage
in%
1.5
11
3.5
15
0.5
6 to24
0.5
13
21
0.5
17
19
1.5
23
1.5
25 *
1.5
* No values are given for h > 25 since they are normally very small
5.1.2 Harmonics
Even harmonics
Uneven harmonics
No multiples
of 3
Order
Even harmonics
Multiples
of 3
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Relative
voltage
in%
1.5
11
3.5
15
0.4
0.5
13
21
0.3
0.5
17 h
49
0.27
21 h
45
0.2
10 h
50
0.25
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Uneven harmonics
No multiples
of 3
Order
Order
h
5
For example, pumps, ventilators, compressors, air conditioning appliances, DC-controlled fans, and compact fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast belong to Group 2.
Compact fluorescent lamps with inductive ballast and
12-pulse converters are typically assigned to Group 1. For
self-commutated converters with pulse width modulated
conversion via power capacitors, the harmonic content is
less than 10% so that such converters dont need to be
considered. However, the same also applies if integrated
harmonic filters for 6- or 12-pulse diode or thyristor inverters ensure a corresponding reduction.
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Relative
voltage
in%
1.5
11
15
0.3
0.5
13
21
0.2
0.5
17
10
0.5
0.2
10 h
50
0.25
0.27
21 h
45
2
3
4
5
Uneven harmonics
No multiples
of 3
Order
Order
h
5
Even harmonics
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Relative
voltage
in%
1.5
11
3.5
15
0.4
0.5
13
21
0.2
17
17 h
49
0.27
6
7
Multiples
of 3
Relative
voltage
in%
21 h
45
0,2
0.5
10
0.5
10 h
50
0.25
8
9
10
11
Uneven harmonics
No multiples
of 3
Order
Multiples
of 3
Relative
voltage
in%
17 h
49
Even harmonics
12
Even harmonics
Multiples
of 3
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
Order
Relative
voltage
in%
2.5
1.5
11
15
13
4.5
21
1.75
17
10
17 h
49
4.5
(17/h)
0.5
10 h
50
21 h
45
13
Relative
voltage
in%
14
15
16
17
73
Con
tents
Intro
duction
4
5
SOS
SA
=b
SkV
SA
back to page 73
If the limit lines of Fig. 5/5 for SOS/SA are exceeded, passive
or active filters can be used as an effective means to limit
harmonic content. While passive filters influence harmonics
of matched frequencies only, an active filter performs an
analysis of the interference and emits a "negative" (i.e.
phase-shifted by 180) harmonic range to quench interferences as far as possible.
8
9
Information
Value view and evaluation
Configure
Value view and evaluation
Maintenance
Process connections
Harmonics voltage
Operational parameters
Process connections
Maximum value
AC operational values
Instantaneous value
Harmonics voltage
Harmonics current
Harmonics voltage L1
Interharmonics voltage
23,90 %
Interharmonics current
AC power and energy
Flicker
19,12 %
Binary status
Modbus slave devices
14,34 %
SICAM subdevices
Load profile
Tariffs (TCU)
Automation functions
9,56 %
Limits
Group indications
10
11
4,78 %
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62
Harmonics voltage L2
Memory management
34,40 %
Transient detection
27,52 %
20,64 %
13,76 %
6,88 %
13
14
15
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62
1.0
Measures required
0.5
Permissible
range
0.2
16
0.1
10
17
back to page 73
TIP04_13_013_EN
12
SOS/SA
An important use of active filters is the reduction of summated N conductor currents produced, for instance, by the
phase angle control of many power supply units or energy-
saving lamps. In particular, the interferences of the third
harmonic with a frequency of 150Hz add up in the N
conductor. Please observe that high N conductor currents
possibly require larger dimensioning of switchgear and
transformers in addition to the cables, as described in
VDE0298-4. You may then consider the use of power
converter transformers. Under certain conditions, the cost
of oversizing transformers is balanced by reduced energy
losses during operation.
50 100
500 1,000
SkV/SA
74
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
10
Magnetic flux density B in T
1/r
Single conductor
1/r2
Supply and
return conductor
1
0,1
10-2
1/r3
10-3
10-4
12
17
2
3
4
Transformer
winding
22
27
32 37 42
47
Distance r in m
TIP04_13_014_EN
to page 76
EMC
7
8
Wiring
1
worse
Sidebyside
with spacing D
1
Configuration:
1 Cu conductor
2 PVC insulation
3 Strand sheathing
4 PVC outer sheathing
Singlecore cable
Configuration:
1 Cu conductor
2 PVC insulation
3 Strand sheathing
4 PVC outer sheathing
Singlecore cable
Configuration:
1 Cu conductor
2 PVC insulation
3 Strand sheathing
4 PVC outer sheathing
2
Multicore
L1L2L3N
with concentric
screening (PE)
12
13
Singlecore cable
Multicore cable
L1L2L3NPE
1 2
11
In bundles
10
Sidebyside
without spacing
better
Type of cable
14
Configuration:
1 Cu conductor
2 PVC insulation
3 Strand sheathing
4 PVC outer sheathing
Multicore cable
Configuration:
1 Cu conductor
2 PVC insulation
3 Strand sheathing
4 Concentric Cu screen
5 PVC outer sheathing
Multicore
cable with
concentric PE
braiding
15
16
17
TIP04_13_015_EN
Fig. 5/7: Classification of simple cable types and wiring with regard to EMC
back to page 76
Totally Integrated Power Quality of Supply
75
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Conductor arrangements
L1 = 1,000 A e-j0
L2 = 1,000 A e-j120
L3 = 950 A e-j240
10
L2
10 cm
L3
L1
11
L1 = 1,000 A e-j0
L2 = 1,000 A e-j120
L3 = 1,000 A e-j240
10 cm
L2
10 cm
L3
12
L1
L1 = 200 A e-j0
L2 = 200 A e-j120
L3 = 200 A e-j240
10 cm
L2
10 cm
L3
13
3c
3c
L3
3 cm
L2
17
L1 = 1,000 A e-j0
L2 = 1,000 A e-j120
L3 = 1,000 A e-j240
L1 L2 L3 LN PE
L1L2L3 NN L3L2L1PE
15
16
10
1
Interference limit ECG
L1
14
100
Magnetic flux density B in T
L1
10 cm
TIP04_13_016_EN
0.01
1
10
50
100
Fig. 5/8: Cable configuration and suitability with regard to EMC (the interference levels for electromyograms (EMG), electrocardiograms
(ECG), and electroencephalograms (EEG) are specified in the standard IEC 60364-7-710 (VDE 0100-710))
76
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Sub-distribution board
10
Main
earth
bar 2
Protective
equipotential
bonding
transformer
11
System earthing
12
U
L1
L2
L3
PEN
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
Central
earth
point
13
TIP04_13_017_EN
Source
Splitter
bridge
14
Main
earth
bar 1
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
15
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
16
17
77
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
Availability
Class (AVC)
Designation
AVC 0
Explanation
AEC-0
Conventional
AEC-1
Highly
Reliable
AEC-2
High
Availability
AEC-3
Fault-resilient
AEC-4
Fault-tolerant
AEC-5
Disastertolerant
Designation
HRG
class
Availability A = MTBF/(MTBF+MTTR)
Minimum
availability
Nonavailability
Downtime per
month
Downtime per
year
~95%
~5%
1 day
Several days
AVC 1
99%
1%
<8h
< 88 h
AVC 2
99.9%
0.1%
< 44 min
<9h
AVC 3
99.99%
0.01%
< 5 min
< 53 min
AVC 4
Highest availability
99.999%
0.001%
< 26 s
< 6 min
AVC 5
Disaster-tolerant
Max. availability
15
Tab. 5/11: Typical availability classes acc. to the High-availability Compendium of the BSI [8]
16
MTBF
17
MTTR
1 day
1 second
Not acceptable
1 month
30 seconds
Still acceptable
10 years
1 hour
User-friendly
78
Operational compatibility
back to page 79
Con
tents
Intro
duction
However, availability only becomes significant if the magnitudes of MTBF and MTTR are known. Tab. 5/12 shows three
estimations of the availability in different fault scenarios.
The percentages of availability differ marginally in the sixth
digit after the decimal point. The significance of a long,
uninterrupted phase of operation is obvious, as many
minor interruptions may impair the work rhythm. Some
guidelines can be derived from this:
Preference should be given to high quality of the products
applied
The number of components used should be kept as small
as possible, since every component must be regarded as a
potential source of trouble
Repeated interference and switching operations, in
particular in connection with modularisation and load-dependent operation, should be avoided
A dependency on single components should be avoided
since their failure or switching off such a single point of
failure (SPOF) would affect the whole system
On top of this, a failure of the electrical power supply
means that a restart of the infrastructure cannot be expected within seconds but more likely after many hours or
even days. If a defect concerns special components such as
the transformers, UPS, or switchgear panels, their replacement may take several days or weeks.
A reliability calculation can be made to quantify the reliability of supply. Using models for the replication of the system
and the associated reliability characteristics, the weaknesses and optimisation options in the electrical power
distribution system can be identified. The following models
describing the power supply operation and failure behaviour are known:
Element model
Failure model
Resupply model
Consumer load model
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
79
Con
tents
Intro
duction
External influences
Supply interruptions can be caused by climatic and atmospheric impacts. Since these cannot be influenced directly,
only their effects can be prevented or minimised by secondary measures in network planning and design as well as in
network operation. Typical incidents are variations in
temperature and humidity, thunderstorms, storms, ice and
snow, wind-borne sand and sea salt, UV radiation, earthquake, landslide, avalanche, flood, water pollution, and
aggressive gases. Also human-influenced actions and
events such as sabotage, plane crash, destruction of cables
during cable work, or unwanted disturbances caused by
animals such as cable bite or body contact are examples of
such occasions which cannot be influenced primarily.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To avoid investments in new equipment, it is often operated beyond its lifetime with very high repair and maintenance expenses. Intensive maintenance definitely improves
the technical condition of equipment, but from a long-term
perspective this can become uneconomical because maintenance work requires high personnel expenses.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Redundant supply
17
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
Personnel
The number of personnel required for reliable operation
largely depends on the size of the network, the technology
used, and the degree of automation of the network. Apart
from the number of personnel also its qualification, i.e. profound training, technical knowledge, and many years of
work experience, plays an important part. Not to be neglected is the ability to work in a team as well as the cooperation of the personnel with external companies.
5
6
7
Switching operation
9
10
11
12
13
14
After fault localisation, it depends on the network configuration to what extent resupply of all consumers is possible
by disconnecting the fault location and switching over to
other supply lines. Repair work often requires interventions
on public ground, for example, blocking and breakup of
roads, which can only be done with the appropriate authority's permission. The relevant authorities' contact addresses
are to be kept up to date. It is even better to make agreements which allow for autonomous actions. This simplifies
15
16
17
81
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
Maintenance
Maintenance combines all measures necessary to retain
(service) and restore (repair) the target state. This also
includes the determination and assessment of the actual
state (inspection). By regularly inspecting the equipment,
weak points and defects can be recognized and rectified in
the course of service and repair.
5
6
7
5.3.3 Redundancy
The availability of a system is influenced by the quality of
its components (the availability of the individual components) on the one hand and redundancy configurations on
the other hand. Generally speaking, redundancy characterizes the use of multiple technical resources which are
technically identical or at least functionally identical. In the
following, the ICT terminology is used.
8
9
10
11
12
13
Standby redundancy
A spare component is operated in idle mode side by side
with the active component. It only becomes active should
the primary component fail. This type of redundancy is also
called cold redundancy or hot redundancy depending on
the duration of readiness. Basically, a spare tyre is a cold
redundancy since refitting takes quite some time. Fig. 5/10
exemplifies the output of the standby UPS being connected
to the input of the static bypass line of the primary UPS.
Only when switching over to the bypass line does the
standby UPS become active. In some texts, standby redundancy is also called isolated redundancy.
14
15
16
17
82
Parallel redundancy
For a certain function of power distribution, one component more than is necessary for its maintenance is employed. To this end, the components must be operated in
parallel. Since the spare component is ready immediately,
we also refer to this as hot redundancy.
5/11 two of the three systems
In the UPS example of Fig. 5/11,
connected in parallel are sufficient to safely supply the
connected load. In the case of maximum utilisation of
redundancy, each of the connected UPS systems supplies
two-third of the required power.
Generalising, we speak of an (n+1) redundancy if n items
of equipment are sufficient in parallel operation to ensure
undisturbed operation so that one item of equipment may
fail or be switched off. Thus, no further redundancy exists
then.
System redundancy
The configuration of two parallel supply systems allows
system redundancy to be obtained. At the same time,
parallelism should be maintained as far as possible down to
the load be supplied. Ideally, electric power supply of
consumers is ensured by at least two redundantly usable,
separate power supply units.
Isolated-parallel redundancy
To cut back somewhat on the expenditure that would be
required for system redundancy, parallel-operating components are used (n+1)-redundantly and the consumers are
divided into several groups supplied in different ways. This
concept, however, only brings advantages when more than
two consumer groups are differentiated that is, at least
three consumer groups and three or more supply groups.
Put simply, the simultaneous modularity of the systems and
Fig. 5/12 a UPS redundancy with (2+1)
loads is utilised. InFig.
parallel-operating UPS systems is distributed to four systems in an isolated-parallel redundancy system
(2+1)+(2+1)+(2+1)+(2+1) = (3+1)^(2+1) for four consumer blocks. The redundancy of the four systems (3+1) is
linked with the redundancy of the components (2+1).
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Secondary UPS
TIP04_13_018_EN
2
Primary UPS
3
4
back to page 82
5
Communication tie
for parallel operation
100
kVA
UPS 2
50 kVA
UPS 3
50 kVA
6
TIP04_13_019_EN
UPS 1
50 kVA
7
8
back to page 82
UPS 10
50 kVA
UPS 11
50 kVA
UPS 12
50 kVA
9
10
Communication
tie for parallel
operation
11
100
kVA
UPS 9
50 kVA
12
UPS 8
50 kVA
UPS 7
50 kVA
13
14
TIP04_13_020_EN
Communication tie
for parallel
operation
100
kVA
UPS 6
50 kVA
UPS 3
50 kVA
100
kVA
UPS 5
50 kVA
UPS 2
50 kVA
100
kVA
UPS 4
50 kVA
UPS 1
50 kVA
15
back to page 82
16
17
83
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
Qc = P (tan1 tan2)
Compensation reduces the transmitted apparent power S
(see Fig. 5/15
5/15). Ohmic transmission losses decrease by the
square of the currents.
9
10
Qc = 0.5 P
12
Apparent power
TIP04_13_021_EN
11
Active power
Reactive power
13
14
15
Magnetic field
16
Grid of the power supplier
17
84
Motor
Drive
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Supply from
medium-voltage network
Qc = 0.1 to 0.2 P
20 kV
4
Iw
Ib
M
TIP04_13_022_EN
400 V
5
6
to page 84
tan =
cos2
1
cos
Qc = Q1 Q2 = P F
Q1
Q2
Qc
S2
P
2
F = tan1 tan2
To simplify the calculation of Qc, Tab. 5/13 states the conversion factors F when a measured cos1 is to be compensated in order to attain a power factor cos2 in operation.
TIP04_13_023_EN
In this case
P Active power
Q1 Reactive power
non-compensated
S1 Apparent power
prior to compensation
Phase angle
10
Apparent power
after compensation
11
Qc Connected
capacitor power
12
to page 84
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Quality of Supply
85
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Actual value
(given)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Conversion factor F
tan1
cos1
cos2
= 0.70
cos2
= 0.75
cos2
= 0.80
cos2
= 0.82
cos2
= 0.85
cos2
= 0.87
cos2
= 0.90
cos2
= 0.92
cos2
= 0.95
cos2
= 0.97
cos2
= 1.00
4.90
0.20
3.88
4.02
4.15
4.20
4.28
4.33
4.41
4.47
4.57
4.65
4.90
3.87
0.25
2.85
2.99
3.12
3.17
3.25
3.31
3.39
3.45
3.54
3.62
3.87
3.18
0.30
2.16
2.30
2.43
2.48
2.56
2.61
2.70
2.75
2.85
2.93
3.18
2.68
0.35
1.66
1.79
1.93
1.98
2.06
2.11
2.19
2.25
2.35
2.43
2.68
2.29
0.40
1.27
1.41
1.54
1.59
1.67
1.72
1.81
1.87
1.96
2.04
2.29
2.16
0.42
1.14
1.28
1.41
1.46
1.54
1.59
1.68
1.74
1.83
1.91
2.16
2.04
0.44
1.02
1.16
1.29
1.34
1.42
1.47
1.56
1.62
1.71
1.79
2.04
1.93
0.46
0.91
1.05
1.18
1.23
1.31
1.36
1.45
1.50
1.60
1.68
1.93
1.83
0.48
0.81
0.95
1.08
1.13
1.21
1.26
1.34
1.40
1.50
1.58
1.83
1.73
0.50
0.71
0.85
0.98
1.03
1.11
1.17
1.25
1.31
1.40
1.48
1.73
1.64
0.52
0.62
0.76
0.89
0.94
1.02
1.08
1.16
1.22
1.31
1.39
1,64
1.56
0.54
0.54
0.68
0.81
0.86
0.94
0.99
1.07
1.13
1.23
1.31
1.56
1.48
0.56
0.46
0.60
0.73
0.78
0.86
0.91
1.00
1.05
1.15
1.23
1.48
1.40
0.58
0.38
0.52
0.65
0.71
0.78
0.84
0.92
0.98
1.08
1.15
1.40
1.33
0.60
0.31
0.45
0.58
0.64
0.71
0.77
0.85
0.91
1.00
1.08
1.33
1.27
0.62
0.25
0.38
0.52
0.57
0.65
0.70
0.78
0.84
0.94
1.01
1.27
1.20
0.64
0.18
0.32
0.45
0.50
0.58
0.63
0.72
0.77
0.87
0.95
1.20
1.14
0.66
0.12
0.26
0.39
0.44
0.52
0.57
0.65
0.71
0.81
0.89
1.14
1.08
0.68
0.06
0.20
0.33
0.38
0.46
0.51
0.59
0.65
0.75
0.83
1.08
1.02
0.70
0.14
0.27
0.32
0.40
0.45
0.54
0.59
0.69
0.77
1.02
0.96
0.72
0.08
0.21
0.27
0.34
0.40
0.48
0.54
0,63
0.71
0.96
0.91
0.74
0.03
0.16
0.21
0.29
0.34
0.42
0.48
0.58
0.66
0.91
0.86
0.76
0.11
0.16
0.24
0.29
0.37
0.43
0.53
0.60
0.86
0.80
0.78
0.05
0.10
0.18
0.24
0.32
0.38
0.47
0.55
0.80
0.75
0.80
0.05
0.13
0.18
0.27
0.32
0.42
0.50
0.75
0.70
0.82
0.08
0.13
0.21
0.27
0.37
0.45
0.70
0.65
0.84
0.03
0.08
0.16
0.22
0.32
0.40
0.65
0.03
0.11
0.17
0.26
0.34
0.59
0.06
0.11
0.21
0.29
0.54
0.06
0.16
0.23
0.48
0.59
0.86
0.54
0.88
0.48
0,90
0.43
0.92
0.10
0.18
0.43
0.36
0,94
0.03
0.11
0.36
0.29
0.96
0.01
0.29
0.20
0.98
0.20
16
17
86
back to page 85
Con
tents
Intro
duction
fres = fN
fres
fN
SkV
QC
SkV
QC
2
3
Resonance frequency in Hz
Line frequency in Hz
Short-circuit power at the linking point in kVA
Compensation power in kvar
5
6
Type of compensation
Characteristic
Applications/operational
conditions
Advantages
Disadvantages
Single compensation
Compensation close to
the power consumer
Higher costs
No simultaneity factor
Consideration of the
simultaneity factor
possible
9
10
11
Reduction of the
capacitor costs
Central compensation
Compensation in main
switchgear or main
substations
Improved utilisation of
the capacitor power
Transport of reactive
power from the
switchgear/station in the
LV network
12
13
14
Easier extendibility
System control possible
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Quality of Supply
87
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Single compensation
3
4
Here, load is taken off the feeder lines to the power consumers; a continuous adjustment of the capacitor power to
its reactive power demand is not possible, however.
TIP04_13_024
In single compensation, the capacitors are directly connected to the terminals of the individual power consumers
and switched on together with them via a common switching device. Here, the capacitor power must be precisely
adjusted to the respective consumers. Single compensation
is frequently used for induction motors (Fig. 5/16).
Group compensation
7
8
9
10
Central compensation
Reactive power control units are used for central compensation, which are directly assigned to a switchgear unit,
distribution board, or sub-distribution board and centrally
installed there. Control units contain switchable capacitor
branch circuits and a controller which acquires the reactive
power present at the feed-in location. If it deviates from the
set-point, the controller switches the capacitors on or off
step by step via contactors.
11
12
13
TIP04_13_025
14
15
Controller
16
TIP04_13_026_EN
17
88
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
Capacitor
(control unit)
6
7
Medium-voltage network
Transformer
Into the
network
Low voltage
From the
power
converter
Into
filter
circuits
I()
TIP04_13_027_EN
Receiver
M
Power converter
9
=5
=7
= 11.13
10
Filter circuits
11
TIP04_13_028_EN
12
Reactor-connected capacitors
13
14
15
16
17
1 The ripple control frequency tables for Germany, Austria, Switzerland, etc. are
available at: rundsteuerung.de
89
Con
tents
Intro
duction
They are designed similar to filter circuits, but their resonance frequency is below the harmonic of the 5th order.
Thus, the capacitor unit becomes inductive for all harmonics present in the converter current and resonance points
can no longer be excited. Choked capacitors and reactive
power control units are to be used according to the same
criteria; they are to be selected like normal capacitors and
control units. For the choking, the tuning frequency determines the choking rate and thus the relation between
choke reactance XL and capacitor reactance XC at system
frequency.
2
3
4
5
fres = fN
1
p
fres
Resonance frequency in Hz
Line frequency in Hz
fN
p Choking rate of the compensation system in
percent, with p = XL/XC
Measured value
acquisition
TIP04_13_029_EN
XL
XC
Non-linear
loads
Linear
loads
Thyristor-switched
compensation
Reactive power Q
TIP04_13_030_EN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
90
Suppression Ih
M
Power converter
Order h = 5
h=7
h=
11.13
Filter circuits
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Please note that filter circuit systems or choked compensation systems must not be operated with unchoked compensation systems in parallel on the same busbar. Otherwise,
unwanted parallel resonances could occur.
Active filters
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
For further information on the dimensioning of compensation systems and filters, please visit: modl.de
Totally Integrated Power Quality of Supply
91
Con
tents
Intro
duction
protection zone(s) (LPZ) (see Fig. 5/23). For each LPZ, the
geometrical borders, relevant characteristics, lightning
threat data, and kinds of damage to be considered are
defined. Starting from the unprotected state of the property, the assumed risk is reduced by taking (further)
protection measures until only an acceptable residual risk
remains. The standard considers not only protection measures for installations with the persons, electrical and electronic systems located therein, but also for supply lines.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Zone 1 (LPZ 1)
Zone 0 (LPZ 0)
Outside the building, direct lightning impact:
No protection against lightning strike (LEMP)
LPZ 0A: endangered by lightning strikes
LPZ 0B: protected against lightning strikes
10
LPZ 0 A
11
LEMP
LPZ 0 B
12
Ventilation
13
LPZ 1
Room shield
IT
network
Terminal
LEMP
LPZ 2
LPZ 0 B
14
LEMP
LPZ 2
LPZ 3
LPZ 0 B
SEMP
15
16
17
Fig. 5/23: Lightning protection zone concept
92
TIP04_13_031_EN
Power
system
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Overvoltage category III: Equipment in stationary installations and for such cases in which special demands are
made on the reliability and availability of the equipment.
4
5
Example: Equipment such as switches in stationary installations and equipment for industrial use with permanent
connection to the stationary installation.
6
7
Direct lightning
strike into the
building structure
LPS (lightning
protection system)
100 %
50 %
HV
Transformer LV cable
50 %
Earthing system of
the transformer
10
TIP04_13_032_EN
Zone 2 (LPZ 2)
Earthing system
of the struck
building structure
11
12
13
Overvoltage category
Three-phase
Single-phase
in V
in V
120240
in V
II
III
IV
in V
in V
in V
in V
50
330
500
800
1,500
100
500
800
1,500
2,500
150
800
1,500
2,500
4,000
230/400
277/480
300
1,500
2,500
4,000
6,000
400/690
600
2,500
4,000
6,000
8,000
1,000
1,000
4,000
6,000
8,000
12,000
14
15
16
17
Tab. 5/15: Overvoltage categories and rated surge voltages in acc. with IEC60664-1 (VDE0110-1)
93
Con
tents
Intro
duction
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Protection stage
15
16
SPD type
Protection level
Designation
Lightning current arrester
4 kV
Surge arrester
2.5 kV
Sub-distribution board
Device protection
1.5 kV
17
94
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
I)
2
3
4
5
type 1
type 2
type 3
6
II)
7
8
9
10
type 1+2
11
type 3
12
III)
13
14
type 2
type 3
TIP04_13_033_EN
15
16
17
to page 94
95
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
96
Chapter 6
Dimensioning of Power Distribution
Systems
6.1 Circuit Types and Basic Rules
6.2 Power System Protection and
Safety Coordination
99
102
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
Basic rules
On principle, circuit dimensioning shall be performed
incompliance with the technical rules/standards listed in
Fig. 6/1. Details will be explained below.
Cross-circuit dimensioning
7
8
9
10
11
Overload protection
IEC 60364-4-43
VDE 0100-430
Short-circuit protection
IEC 60364-4-43/
IEC 60364-5-54
VDE 0100-430/
VDE 0100-540
IEC 60364-4-41
VDE 0100-410
Voltage drop
IEC 60364-5-52
IEC 60038
VDE 0100-520
VDE 0175-1
Selectivity
IEC 60364-7-710
IEC 60364-7-718
IEC 60947-2
IEC 60898-1
VDE 0100-710
VDE 0100-718
VDE 0660-101
VDE 0641-11
12
13
14
16
17
Fig. 6/1: Standards for dimensioning protection devices and routing in circuits
98
TIP04_13_034_EN
15
Con
tents
Intro
duction
for attaining the best possible selectivity towards all upstream and downstream devices.
Distribution circuit
Dimensioning of cable routes and devices follows the
maximum load currents to be expected at this distribution
level. As a rule:
5
6
IB In Iz
The nominal current In of the selected device must be in
between the established maximum load current IB and the
maximum permissible load current Iz of the selected transmission medium (cable or busbar trunking system).
10
11
IB Ir Iz
12
13
14
I2 1.45 Iz
The maximum permissible load current Iz of the selected
transmission medium must be above the high test current
I2/1.45 of the selected device. The high test current I2 is
standardised and varies according to type and characteristics of the protection equipment applied.
15
17
16
99
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
Short-circuit energy
Short-circuit time
K2S2 I2t
ta (Ikmin) 5s
The resulting current breaking time of the selected protection equipment must ensure that the calculated minimum
short-circuit current Ikmin at the end of the transmission line
or protected line is automatically cleared within 5s at the
latest. Overload and short-circuit protection neednt necessarily be provided by one and the same device. If required,
these two protection targets may be accomplished by a
device combination. The use of separate switching/protection devices could also be considered, i.e. at the start and
end of a cable route. As a rule, devices applied at the end of
a cable route can ensure overload protection for this line
only.
4
5
6
Final circuits
The method for coordinating overload and short-circuit
protection is practically identical for distribution and final
circuits. Besides overload and short-circuit protection, the
protection of human life is also important for all circuits.
8
9
10
11
Disconnection
Signalling
12
13
14
15
16
TT system
IT system
Overcurrent
protection devices
Overcurrent
protection devices
Insulation
monitoring devices
Residual-current
devices (RCD)
Residual-current
devices (RCD)
Overcurrent
protection devices
In special cases:
fault-voltage-operated
protection devices
Residual-current
devices (RCD)
In special cases:
fault-voltage-operated
protection devices
17
Fig. 6/2: Dependency of personal protection on power supply systems
100
IT system
Insulation
monitoring
devices
TIP04_13_035_EN
TN system
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
101
Con
tents
Intro
duction
4
5
6
7
6.2.1 Terminology
Electrical installations in a power system are protected
either by protection equipment allocated to the installation
components or by combinations of these protection
elements.
8
9
Standby protection
10
11
Back-up protection
If a short circuit, which is higher than the rated switching
capacity of the protection device used, occurs at a particular point in the system, back-up protection must provide
protection for the downstream installation component and
for the protection device by means of an upstream protection device.
12
13
Selectivity
Selectivity is increasingly called for as standard in invitations to tender. Often this characterizes a requirement
placed on two or more overcurrent protection devices
which is defined as overcurrent selectivity in the
IEC60947-1 (VDE0660-100) standard. Due to the complexity of this issue, information about the proper selection
and application of these "selective" protection devices is
often insufficient. These requirements as well as the effects
of full or partial selectivity in power distribution systems
within the context of the relevant standard, industry,
country, network configuration or type of connection to
earth should be clarified in advance with the network
planners, installation companies, and power system operators involved. The system interconnection together with
the five rules of circuit dimensioning must also be taken
into account (see Fig. 6/1).
Full selectivity is achieved with two series-connected
protection devices if, when a fault occurs after the downstream protection device, only the downstream device
disconnects from supply. A distinction is made between
two types of selectivity:
Type tested in accordance with IEC60947-2
(VDE660101): Overcurrent discrimination of two
series-connected overcurrent protection devices, where
the load-side protection device takes over the full protection task up to a defined overcurrent level without the
other protection device being active
Full selectivity acc. to IEC60947-2 (VDE660-101): Overcurrent discrimination of two series-connected overcurrent protection devices, where the load-side protection
device takes over the full protection task without the
other protection device being active
Note: Full selectivity always refers to the maximum fault
current Ikmax at the mounting location.
14
15
16
17
102
Con
tents
Intro
duction
definite-time-delayed
inversetimedelayed
HV HRC fuse
Tripping on
short circuit
Medium-voltage circuit-breaker
with overcurrent-time protection
Adjustable characteristic
curves or setting ranges
7
8
inverse-time delay
I 2 t = constant
I 4 t = constant
definite-time-delay
10
I 2 t = constant
11
instantaneous
LV HRC fuse
Adjustable characteristic
curves or setting ranges
TIP04_13_037_EN
TIP04_13_036_EN
Fig. 6/4: Protection characteristic of LV HRC fuse and LV circuitbreaker with releases
12
13
14
15
16
17
103
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Releases/protection functions
Protection characteristics
17
104
Con
tents
Intro
duction
t in s
IrN
Ir
1,000
tr
100
10
Ig
Isd
tg
tsd
Ii
TIP04_13_038_EN
0.1
0.01
0.5
10
50
Overcurrent release L
Standard I2t
optional I4t
Shorttime delayed
shortcircuit release S
Standard tsd
optional I2t
Instantaneous
shortcircuit release I
Standard On
optional Off
Earthfault release
Standard tE
optional I2t
6
7
100
I in kA
8
back to page 104
Generally it is required:
Isd or Ii Ik min 20%
The requirement that defined tripping conditions be
observed determines the maximum conductor lengths or
their cross sections
Selective current grading can only be attained if the
short-circuit currents are known
In addition to current grading, partial selectivity can be
achieved using combinations of carefully matched protection devices
In principle, the highest short-circuit current can be both
the three-phase and the single-phase short-circuit current
When feeding into LV networks, the single-phase fault
current will be greater than the three-phase fault current
if transformers with the Dy connection are used
The single-phase short-circuit current will be the lowest
fault current if the damping zero phase-sequence impedance of the LV cable is active
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
105
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Plotting the tripping characteristics of the graded protection devices together with their tolerance bands and
breaker time to contact separation values in a grading
diagram will help to verify and visualize selectivity.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
For the sake of clarity, only the delay time tsd is plotted for
circuit-breakers with definite-time-delay overcurrent releases (S), and only the opening time to for circuit-breakers
with instantaneous overcurrent releases (I).
Grading principle
120
100
40
t
20
min 10
Q1
Ikmin
Q2
L (cold)
4
2
1
Ikmax
TIP04_13_039_EN
20
10
4
2
1
400
200
100
ms
40
20
10
S
I
t st
150 ms
t i < 30 ms
2
101 2 3 4 6 102 2 3 4 6 103 2 3 4 6 104 2 3 4 6 105
106
t sd 180 ms
to page 107
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Current I
11
Protection
time setting
Operating
current
Variation time
of protection
12
Variation time
of circuit-breaker
Variation time
of protection
13
Load current
Current-breaking
time
of circuit-breaker
Total current-breaking
time tg of circuit-breaker
Release
time
Safety
margin
TIP04_13_040_EN
14
15
16
17
107
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
Back-up protection
Only the grading time tst and delay time tsd are relevant for
time grading between several series-connected circuit-breakers or in conjunction with LV HRC fuses (Fig. 6/8).
The grading time tsd2 of breaker Q2 can roughly be equalized to the grading time tst2 and the delay time tsd3 of
breaker Q3 is received from the sum of grading times tst2 +
tst3. The resulting inaccuracies are corrected by the calculated safety margins, which are added to the grading times.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Irrespective of the type of S-release (mechanical or electronic), a grading time of 70 ms to 100ms is necessary
between a circuit-breaker and a downstream LV HRC fuse.
10
11
12
Q3
L
S
13
14
tsd3
tst3
Q2
L
S
tsd2
15
Q1
L
I
16
tsd2 tst2
Safety
margin
L
S
I
inverse-time delayed, Ir
definite-time delayed, Isd, tsd
instantaneous, Ii
Time t
108
t1
17
t1
tst2
tst3
tsd2
tsd3
TIP04_13_041_EN
Chapter 7
Protection Devices
for Low-Voltage Distribution
7.1 Circuit-breakers
with Protection Functions
112
7.2 Fuses
116
7.3 Switchgear Assemblies
117
7.4 Miniature Circuit-breaker
129
7.5 Selectivity in Low-Voltage Grids
134
7.6 Protection of Low-Voltage Capacitors 147
7.7 Protection of Distribution Transformers148
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
Protection devices used in
MV
4
LV
Switch-disconnectors,
HV HRC fuses
Circuit-breaker, current
transformer, overcurrent
protection
Circuit-breakers or
LVHRC fuses
Tie breakers
Circuit-breaker
Medium-voltage side
HV HRC
MV
LV
parallel
operation
HV HRCHV HRC
MV
LV
LV
HRC
I>
I >>
MV
LV
MV
LV
optionally
Normally
Normally optionally
optionally
single and
single and
630
A
630 A 630 A
parallelparallel
operation
operation
LV
HRC
I>
I >>
Normally
single and
parallel
operation
I>
I >>
MV
LV
MV
LV
Normally
Normally
single and
single and
parallelparallel
operation
operation
LV
HRC
10
11
12
HV HRC or LV HRC
fuse
HV HRC
or HRC
LV HRC
fuse
HV
or LV
HRC fuse
14
Independent overcurrent-time
protection,
Independent overcurrent-time
protection,
overcurrent-time
protection,
I>
> and I >>, Independent
at Icurrent
two-level
II >
at current
transformer
two-level
>
and
transformer
two-level
IItransformer
>>>,
and
I >>, at current
Withdrawable Withdrawable
circuit-breaker
I >>
I >>
circuit-breaker
Withdrawable
circuit-breaker
(with cut-off point)
(with
cut-off
point) point)
(with cut-off
Reactive-power
control
unit
Reactive-power
control
unit
Reactive-power control unit
Switch-disconnector
Switch-disconnector
Switch-disconnector
15
Contactor
Contactor
Contactor
Overload relayOverload
relay relay
Overload
16
Tab. 7/1: Overview of protection grading schemes for transformer and LV circuits
17
110
TIP04_13_044_EN
I>
I >>
TIP04_13_044_EN
13
Circuit-breakerCircuit-breaker
Circuit-breaker
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Protection devices
Standard
Overload protection
Short-circuit protection
Fuses gG
Miniature circuit-breaker
1
2
3
4
5
Tab. 7/2: Overcurrent protection devices for cables and lines and their protection task
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
111
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Protection function
Code
11
12
Overload protection
L
LT
(long time)
Selective short-circuit
protection (with delay)
S1)
ST
(short time)
Earth-fault protection
G1)
GF
(ground fault)
13
14
Short-circuit protection
(instantaneous)
15
1)
16
I
INST
(instantaneous)
I>
not delayed
or SENTRON 3WL and 3VA/3VL circuit-breakers by Siemens also with zone-selective interlocking (ZSI acc. to IEC/TR 61912-2).
F
In the following sections, combinations of releases will only be referred to by their codes as L-, S-, and I-releases, etc.
17
112
Graphic symbol
>>
I>
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
TMTU
ETU
thermal
inverse-time
delay
inverse-time
delay
I2t = constant
4
I4t = constant
inverse-timedelay
I2t
I
instantaneous
= constant
7
definite-time
delay
instantaneous
I
Adjustable characteristic curves or setting ranges
TIP04_13_168_EN
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
113
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
Circuit-breaker
with I-release
Q2
circuit-breaker
with LI-release
Q1
TIP04_13_047_EN
and
If circuit-breakers with definite-time-delay (i.e. short-timedelay) overcurrent releases (S) are used for time-selective
short-circuit protection with ETU, it should be kept in mind
that the circuit-breakers are designed for a specific maximum permissible thermal and dynamic load. If the time
delay causes this load limit to be exceeded in the event of a
short circuit, an instantaneous release (I) must also be used
to ensure that the circuit-breaker is disconnected instantaneously in case of very high short-circuit currents (Fig. 7/2).
The information supplied by the manufacturer should be
consulted when selecting an appropriate trip unit. Optionally, an I2t characteristic can be used for the S-release of an
ETU. The electromagnetic I-releases of a TMTU can be set.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
IcmIcu
114
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Icu
(r.m.s. value inkA)
Power factor
cos
4.5<Icu6
0.7
1.5
6<Icu10
0.5
1.7
10<Icu20
0.3
2.0
20<Icu50
0.25
2.1
50<Icu
0.2
2.2
Rated current
Inin A
In2,500
In>2,500
30kA
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cut-off/let-through values
For zero-current interrupters, the cut-off current ID of the
circuit-breaker is equal to the solid short-circuit current. The
current-limiting circuit-breaker reaches the cut-off current
as the maximum momentary value during disconnecting,
dependent on the solid short-circuit current. The short-
circuit trip unit shall trip within a limit range of 20% of
the set trip value. The manufacturer usually provides
characteristic curves for the different tripping times.
The Joule integral (I2t during disconnecting) is referred to
as let-through energy. With increasing current, the letthrough energy of the circuit-breaker also rises. In analogy
to the cut-off current, the let-through energy of a current-
limiting circuit-breaker is significantly lower than for the
sine halfwave with solid short-circuit current.
Rated circuit-breaker currents
The rated currentIn of circuit-breakers corresponds to
therated continuous current Iu from IEC60947-1
(VDE0660100) and is equal to the conventional free-air
thermal current Ith. The conventional enclosed thermal
current Ithe must be specified if it deviates from the rated
current.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
115
Con
tents
Intro
duction
7.2 Fuses
2
3
4
5
6
The fuse classification according to application and operating voltages is specified in accordance with CLC/TR
60269-5 (VDE0636-5) in Tab. 7/6. Full-range fuses (g)
switch all overcurrents up to the rated breaking capacity,
which results in fusing the fusible element. Partial range
fuses (a) as back-up fuses must only be used for tripping in
case of short-circuit currents and thus as protection for
downstream motor starters or circuit-breakers.
Operational class gG
Fuses for interrupting overcurrents in lines and installations belong to this class. For their selection the highest
operating voltage and the operating current of the circuit
aredetermined first. According to IEC60364-4-43
(VDE0100430) the following applies to the rated
currentof a gG fuse:
7
8
10
11
Type
12
13
14
15
16
17
Interruption
range
Rated voltageV AC
Maximum operating
voltageV AC
gG
General applications
Full range
230/400/500/690 V
253/440/550/725 V
gM
Full range
230/400/500/690 V
253/440/550/725 V
aM
Partial range
(back-up)
230/400/500/690 V
253/440/550/725 V
gN
Full range
600V
600V
gD
Full range
600V
600V
aR
Partial range
(back-up)
230/400/500/690 V 2)
253/440/550/725 V 1)
gR, gS
Full range
230/400/500/690 V 2)
253/440/550/725 V 1)
gU
Full range
230/400/500/690 V
253/440/550/725 V
Full range
2)
Tab. 7/6: Classification of LVHRC fuses based on their functional characteristics defined in CLC/TR 60269-5 (VDE0636-5)
116
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Prearcing time in s
ts
TIP04_13_042_EN
104
103
102
7
8
9
10
11
Operational class
gG
aM
101
Circuitbreaker
12
Fuse
Fuse
13
Circuitbreaker
100
14
Ik
10-1
Icu
Ik
15
I
8
10-3
4
102
Response
103
104
I in A
Disconnection
L-release
I-release
Circuit-breaker
Fuse
Fuse +
Circuit-breaker
TIP04_13_043_EN
10-2
16
17
117
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The switchgear assembly comprising contactor and overload relay is referred to as a motor starter or, if a threephase motor is started directly, a direct-on-line starter. The
contactor is used to switch the motor on and off. The
overload relay protects the motor, motor supply conductors, and contactor against overloading. The fuse upstream
of the contactor and overload relay provides protection
against short circuits. For this reason, the protection ranges
and characteristics of all the components (Fig. 7/5) must be
carefully coordinated with each other.
4
5
6
7
8
9
Coordination type 1: Destruction of contactor and overload relay are permissible. The contactor and/or overload
relay must be replaced if necessary
Coordination type 2: The overload relay must not be
damaged. Contact welding at the contactor is, however,
permissible, given the contacts can easily be separated or
the contactor can easily be replaced
Protection and operating ranges of equipment
Grading diagram for a motor starter
The protection ranges and the relevant characteristics of
the equipment constituting a switchgear assembly used
asa motor starter are illustrated in the grading diagram in
Fig. 7/5. The fuses in this assembly must satisfy a number
of conditions:
The time-current characteristics of fuses and overload
relays must allow the motor to be run up to speed
The fuses must protect the overload relay from being
destroyed by currents approximately 10times higher
than the rated current of the relay
The fuses must interrupt overcurrents beyond the capability of the contactor (i.e. currents approximately
10times higher than the rated operating current Ie of
the contactor)
In the event of a short-circuit, the fuses must protect the
contactor such that any damage does not exceed the
10
11
12
13
1
1 min
2
3
4
14
5
B
A
15
16
3
1 ms
17
4 (dependent on
current limiting
performed by fuse)
5
C
6
A, B, C
Safety margins
in case of proper
short-circuit protection
Fig. 7/5: Switchgear assembly comprising fuse, contactor, and thermal inverse-time-delay overload relay
118
TIP04_13_045_EN
1
Module with
LV HRC fuse,
contactor
and thermal
overload relay
(motor starter)
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Protection of contactor
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
119
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
and
8
9
10
circuit-breaker
with LI-release
Q1
ip
Circuit-breaker
with I-release
Q2
TIP04_13_047_EN
I
ID1
ID(1+2)
11
Ue
UB(1+2)
UB1
12
t
TIP04_13_048_EN
13
14
15
ip
ID1
16
UB1
17
120
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Circuit-breaker
with I-releases
Contactor
L
1
4
Overload protection is provided by the overload relay in
conjunction with the contactor, while short-circuit protection is provided by the starter circuit-breaker ("starter
protector"). The operating current of its I-release is set as
low as the starting cycle will permit, in order to include low
short-circuit currents in the instantaneous breaking range
as well (Fig. 7/9). The advantage of this switchgear
assembly is that it is possible to determine whether the
fault was an overload or short circuit according to whether
the contactor, triggered by the overload relay, or the starter
circuit-breaker has opened. Further advantages of the
starter circuit-breaker following short-circuit tripping are
three-phase circuit interruption and immediate readiness
for reclosing. Switchgear assemblies with starter circuit-
breakers are becoming increasingly important in control
units without fuses.
Icu
TIP04_13_049_EN
I
1 Rated breaking capacity
of contactor
2 Rated making capacity
of contactor
3 Characteristic contactor
curve for easily separable
contact welding
Icu
Characteristic curve
of inverse-time-delay
overload release
Characteristic curve
of instantaneous
electromagnetic
overcurrent releases
Rated short-circuit breaking
capacity of circuit-breaker
Contactor
Inverse-time-delay
overload relay
with L-release
Setting range
Disconnection
Contactor
Circuit-breaker
L Characteristic curve of
(thermal) inverse-timedelay overload relay
TIP04_13_050_EN
I-release
11
12
14
Icu
L-release
13
Trip
10
Circuit-breaker
with I-release
for starter assemblies
I Characteristic curve of
adjustable instantaneous
overcurrent release
15
16
17
121
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
a)
b)
Fuse
12
c)
d)
Fuse
Circuit-breakers
with L- and I-releases
13
Contactor
Circuit-breakers
with L- and I-releases
Circuit-breaker
with I-releases
Contactor
Contactor
Overload relay
14
15
Overload relay
Thermistor
motor protection
Thermistor
motor protection
Thermistor
motor protection
Thermistor
motor protection
TIP04_13_051_EN
11
16
Fig. 7/10: Switchgear assembly comprising comprising thermistor motor protection plus additional overload relay or release (schematic
circuit diagram)
17
122
Con
tents
Intro
duction
cos 0.3
ID
63 A
ID
cos 0.7
ip
63 A I
D 100 A
cos 0.5
13
10
8
cos 0.25
10
22
Short-circuit currents Ik in kA
100
ID Cut-off current
TIP04_13_052_EN
6
7
ID Circuit-breaker 8 kA
t
a, a
B A
10 ms
B: 1.051.2 In
12
Icu
Ikmin
Ir (Ie)
11
a
10 s
a
10
2h
A: 1.251.6 Ir
2 Overload range
3 Short-circuit current range
A Test range for fuse currents
Icu
Ikmax 100
I in kA
TIP04_13_053_EN
13
14
15
16
17
123
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
124
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Characteristic
Fuse
Circuit-breaker
type1))
f (Ir Ue
Current limiting
f (In Ik)
f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
None
f (Ir Ik Ue type1))
Yes
No
With expense2)
Yes
Remote switching
No
Yes
With expense3)
Yes
expense4)
Yes
2
3
4
Signalling option
With
Interlocking
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
f (condition)
Service interruption
Yes
f (condition)
Maintenance expense
No
Selectivity
No expense
Replaceability
Yes5)
Short-circuit protection:
Cable and line
Motor
Very good
Very good
Good
Good
Overload protection:
Cable and line
Motor
Sufficient
Not possible
Good
Good
5
6
7
8
9
1)
Type of construction may be: arc-quenching method, short-circuit strength owing to specific resistance, constructive design
2) For example by means of shock-hazard protected fuse-switch-disconnectors with high-speed closing
3) By means of fuse monitoring and dedicated circuit-breaker
4) By means of fuse monitoring
5) Because standardised
Tab. 7/7: Test range limits for the tripping performance of protection equipment (f() denotes a functional
dependence of the characteristic from the quantities and parameters in brackets)
10
back to page 124
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
125
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Circuit-breaker
Protected items
and switching
frequency
Contactor
Overload
protection
Thermistor motor
protection
5
6
7
M
3~
M
3~
Overload protection
Cable and line
Motors (with thermally critical stators)
Motors (with thermally critical rotors)
++
++1)
++1)
++
++
++
+
++
+
+
++
+
++
++
++
++
++
++
Short-circuit protection
Cable and line
Motor
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
Switching frequency
++
++
++
Circuit-breaker
Protected items
and switching
frequency
10
Contactor
Overload
protection
Thermistor/
SIMOCODE motor
protection
11
12
13
14
M
3~
M
3~
++
++1)
++1)
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++1)
++1)
+
++
++
Short-circuit protection
Cable and line
Motor
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
++
Switching frequency
Protection with minor restriction in the event of a line failure ++very good +good minor
Tab. 7/8: Comparison between the protection characteristics of different switchgear assemblies
(schematic circuit diagrams)
16
17
126
Overload protection
Cable and line
Motors (with thermally critical stators)
Motors (with thermally critical rotors)
1)
15
M
3~
Con
tents
Intro
duction
L
Adjustable
L
Fixed setting
S
Adjustable
I
Fixed setting
I
Adjustable
Ik1
2
Fuse
Type of circuit-breaker
No.
Tripping
characteristic 1)
Feed-in circuit-breaker
1
1
Circuit-breaker for
system protection with
selectivity requirement
Icu
t
Ik1
Ik1 I
Distribution circuit-breaker
2
2
Ik2
Icu
t
Ik2
Ik2
Ik2 I
Ik2
Load circuit-breaker
3
Ik3
Ik3
Icu
t
Ik3
4
Ik3
5
Ik3 Ik3
V
M
3~
Ik3
Ik3
M
3~
Ik3
Ik3
10
Icu
t
11
Icu
t
12
Ik3 I
1)
13
Adjustable release
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Protection Devices for Low-Voltage Distribution
127
Con
tents
Intro
duction
I
Fixed setting
I
Adjustable
Type of circuit-breaker
S
Adjustable
No.
L
Fixed setting
L
Adjustable
Ik1
Tripping characteristic 1)
Feed-in circuit-breaker
Icu
t
1
Ik1 I
Ik1
Distribution circuit-breaker
22)
Ik2
Ik2
Ik2
Ik2
Or
Or
Icu
t
Ik2 I
Icu
t
Ik2 I
Load circuit-breaker
10
Ik3
Icu
t
11
Ik3
4
Ik3
12
M
3~
13
1)
Ik3
Ik3
Ik3
M
3~
Icu
t
Ik3
Adjustable release
14
15
16
17
128
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Versions
Tripping characteristics
Four tripping characteristics (A, B, C, and D) are available
for any kind of application; they correspond to the equipment being connected in the circuit to be protected.
Tripping characteristic A is particularly suitable for the
protection of transducers in measuring circuits, for circuits with electronic control and where disconnection
within 0.4 s is required in accordance with
IEC60364441 (VDE0100410)
Tripping characteristic B in accordance with IEC60898-1
(VDE0641-11) is the standard characteristic for socket
circuits in residential and commercial buildings
Tripping characteristic C in accordance with IEC60898-1
(VDE0641-11) has advantages when used with equipment with higher inrush currents such as luminaires and
motors
Tripping characteristic D in accordance with IEC60898-1
(VDE0641-11) is adapted to intensely pulse-generating
equipment such as transformers, solenoid valves or
capacitors
Operating method
Miniature circuit-breakers are manually operated protection
switches providing remote overcurrent tripping (instantaneous thermal overcurrent release). Multi-phase devices
are coupled mechanically at the outside through the handles and also inside through their releases.
Standards
International basic standards are IEC60898-1 and
IEC60898-2. In Germany, the national standards
VDE0641-11 and VDE0641-12 are based on them. The
sizes are described in DIN 43880. Regarding personal
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
129
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
I B In I z
I2 1.45 Iz
IB
Iz
In
I2
Int
I1
It
I2
Time t
11
12
I3
13
14
I3
15
16
17
TIP04_13_054_EN
I5
I4
IBInIz
IB
Iz
1,45 Iz
In
Int
It
I3
I4
I5
1.45 Iz
Fig. 7/13: Schematic reference value diagram of lines and their protection devices
130
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Temperature impact
I21.45 Iz
in mm2
300
2
conductors
under load
in A
3
conductors
under load
in A
3
conductors
under load
in A
I1 (t > 1h)
B
C
D
1.13 In 1.13 In 1.13 In 1.13 In
I2 (t < 1h)
I4 (t > 0.1 s)
I5 (t < 0.1 s)
10
2 In
3 In
5 In
10 In
3 In
5 In
10 In
20 In
11
12
2)
I3
1
0.4
I5
I5
19.5
17.5
2.5
25
20
27
24
32
32
36
32
40
40
46
41
10
63
50
63
57
16
80
63
85
76
1)
2)
100
80
112
96
125
100
138
119
I4
I4
I4
I4
8 10
TIP04_13_055_EN
0.1
20
13
14
I5
I5
16
0.01
10
I3
16
25
1.5
35
A1)
60
Iz (line)
permissible continuous
load current in case of
2
conductors
under load
in A
I1 I2
Seconds
10
section qn
Resistance to climate
Rated cross
This has to be taken into account in particular for an installation in hot rooms, in encapsulated distribution boards
where, owing to the current-induced heat losses of the
built-in devices, higher temperatures may prevail and for
distribution boards installed outdoors. MCBs can be used at
temperatures ranging from 25C to +55C. The relative
humidity may be 95%.
Time t
Minutes
30 40
60 80 100
15
16
17
131
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Degree of protection
2
3
4
Installation
8
9
10
6000 .
3
Selectivity
Selectivity means that only that protection device will trip
inthe event of a fault which is closest to the fault location
in the current path. This way the energy flow can be
maintained in circuits which are connected in parallel. In
7/15 the current curve in a disconnection process is
Fig. 7/15,
shown schematically with regard to current-limiting classes.
Siemens MCBs of type B16 reduce the energy flow to
muchlower values than defined for current limiting class 3.
Fig. 7/15 shows the selectivity limits of MCBs with different
current limiting classes as the intersection of the MCB
tripping curve with the prearcing characteristic of the fuse.
The highly effective current limitation of the MCB can also
be noted as a better selectivity towards the line-side fuse.
Back-up protection
11
12
13
14
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
in A
15
16
17
16 A
20, 25, 32 A
40 A
50, 63 A
Type B
Type C
Type B
Type C
Type B
Type C
Type B
Type C
3,000
15,000
17,000
18,000
20,000
21,600
24,000
28,000
30,000
4,500
25,000
28,000
32,000
37,000
38,400
45,000
48,000
55,000
6,000
35,000
40,000
45,000
52,000
54,000
63,000
65,000
75,000
10,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
108,000
120,000
135,000
145,000
Tab. 7/12: According to EN 60898-1/A13 (VDE 0641-11/A13): permissible I2t-(let-through) values of current limiting class 3 (in A2s) for
MCBs type B and C up to 63 A
132
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Permisssible I2t value of 1.5 mm2 line
I2t in A2s
Transformer
Fuse
MCB
DIAZED 50 A
11
1
12
B 16
104
Ik
13
I in A
B 16
TIP04_13_056_EN
Ieff
Sine half-wave
10
103
10-1
0.3
0.6
t in ms
Fig. 7/15: Selectivity of MCBs in current limiting classes 1, 2, and 3 towards back-up fuses (curve B16 applies
to Siemens model 16A, tripping characteristic B)
14
15
101
Ik in kA
16
17
133
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Selectivity types
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
134
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
As a rule, all selectivity limits between two protection
devices can be determined by carrying out measurements
or tests. These measurements are virtually indispensable,
particularly when assessing selectivity in the event of a
short circuit, owing to the extremely rapid switching operations when current-limiting protection equipment is used.
The measurements can, however, be very costly and complicated, which is why many manufacturers publish selectivity tables for their switchgear. If SIMARIS design is used,
the software automatically takes all these criteria for
Siemens products into account.
An approximation of minimum selectivity limits for switchgear assemblies can be performed as follows:
With supply-side circuit-breaker
by comparing the cut-off current characteristic of the
nearest load-side device with the operating value of the
instantaneous short-circuit release for the line-side device
With upstream fuse
Selectivity prevails, as long as the let-through energy of
the downstream protection device does not exceed the
prearcing energy of the fuse
ts in s
200 A
(160)
100 A
Gr.00
Ik=1,300 A
50 A
50 A
100 A
Ik =
1,300 A
K1
200 A
Gr.1
TIP04_13_057_EN
1.4
0.03
101
102
103
1.3
1.37 s
10 4
I in A
a) Selective isolating of the
short-circuit location K1
8
time-current diagram can be omitted for fuses of the
same operational class
Selectivity between series-connected fuses with different
operational classes:
Since the shape of the time-current characteristics differ
for different operational classes (for example aM and gG)
a comparison of characteristics is necessary. The associated data must be provided by the manufacturer. For
LVHRC fuses by Siemens the data for computer-based
selectivity determination is integrated in SIMARIS design
The Joule integral (I2t values) should be compared in the
case of high short-circuit currents. In the example shown in
Fig. 7/16, an LVHRC fuse with 160A would also be fully
selective towards a fuse with 100A.
Selectivity between series-connected circuit-breakers
The different releases of circuit-breakers allow to attain
selectivity by proceeding in different ways when grading:
Current selectivity
Dynamic selectivity (energy selectivity)
Time selectivity
Time-reduced selectivity control for zone-selective interlocking (ZSI)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
135
Con
tents
Intro
duction
ally be set to less than Ikmin -20 % so that even very small
short circuits are cleared at the input terminals of the
downstream circuit-breaker Q1 within the required time
Selectivity can be achieved by grading the operating currents of I-releases (Fig. 7/17).
5
6
7
8
9
Opening time t in s
Sr = 400 kVA
at 400 V,
50 Hz
10
10 4
min.
11
ukr = 4 %
Ir = 577 A
Ik = 15 kA
12
Q1
I
II
103
101
Ie = 600 A
(L-release)
Ie = 4,000 A
(I-release)
Q2
Ik = 10 kA
13
Q2
102
102
10 0
L
101
II
Q1
5.0 kA
10 0
I
10 -1
TIP04_13_058_EN
14
Ie = 60 A
(L-release)
Ie = 720 A
(I-release)
15
10 -2
2.1 kA
M
3~
16
Block diagram
Q1 Circuit-breaker for motor protection
(current-limiting)
Q2 Circuit-breaker (zero-current interrupter)
17
102
103
10 4
Tripping characteristics
L Inverse-time delay overload release
I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Fig. 7/17: Current selectivity for two series-connected circuit-breakers at different short-circuit current levels (example)
136
Current I in A
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The upstream circuit-breaker is equipped with short-timedelay overcurrent releases (S) so that, if a fault occurs, only
the downstream circuit-breaker disconnects the affected
part of the installation from the system. Time grading can
be implemented to safeguard selectivity if the prospective
short-circuit currents are almost identical. This requires
grading of both the tripping delays and the operating
currents of the overcurrent releases.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Circuitbreaker
Supply
network
Delay time tv
of S-release
10
11
3WL1
300 ms
12
3WL1
3VL
3VA
200 ms
3VL
3VA
100 ms
14
3VL
3RV
3VA
instantaneous
15
13
TIP04_13_059_EN
Electronic S-releases
Fig. 7/18: Required delay time settings for electromagnetic shorttime-delay S-releases for selective short-circuit protection
16
17
137
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Additional I-releases
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Sn = 1,000 kVA
at 400 V,
50 Hz
11
ukr = 6 %
In = 1,445 A
Ik = 24.1 kA
12
Opening time t in s
10 4
103
tsd3 = 200 ms
Ii (20 kA)
Q3
Main
distribution
board
13
Q3
tsd2 = 100 ms
10 0
Subdistribution
board
15
Q2
101
Q2
14
Q1
102
Ik = 17 kA
tsd2 =
tsd3 =
200 ms
100 ms
10 -1
Q1
I
Ik = 10 kA
16
TIP04_13_060_EN
M
~
10 -2
102
103
10 4
10 5
Current I in A
17
Fig. 7/19: Selectivity between three series-connected circuit-breakers with limitation of short-circuit stress by means of an additional
I-release in circuit-breaker Q3
138
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Ii
103
tsd = 100 ms
t ZSI = 50 ms Q4
3~
A
Q2
E
t i = 10 ms
t ZSI = 50 ms
Q1
Q1/Q2/Q4
Q3
Q5
12
A
E
tsd
ti
tZSI
=
=
=
=
=
tsd = 200 ms
tsd = 100 ms
t ZSI
13
Icu
14
10 -1
ti =
10 ms
10 -2
Communication line
10
101
t i = 10 ms
11
10 0
3~
102
K1
3~
A
E
tsd = 10 ms
t ZSI = 50 ms
TIP04_13_061_EN
tsd = 200 ms
t ZSI = 50 ms
F1 Fuse
Q1 Circuit-breaker
L Inverse-time-delay overcurrent release
I Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Ii Operating current of I-release
The time-current characteristics (scatter bands) do not touch
Opening time t in s
10 4
K2
A
E
Overcurrent limit
Q3
F1
Due to the dynamic processes that take place in electromagnetic releases, full selectivity can also be achieved with
fuses, whose ID briefly exceeds the operating current of the
release. Once again, a reliable statement about selectivity
can only be made by means of measurements or complex
simulations.
A
E
Q5
Q1
TIP04_13_062_EN
F1 Q1
102
103
10 4
Fig. 7/20: Zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) of series- or parallel-connected circuit-breakers (block diagram)
10 5
Current I in A
15
16
17
139
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
Q1
F1
F1 Q1
12
13
Q1
F1
14
Ik
L
S
tA
Isd
ts
tsd
15
16
17
ts
Isd
L
I
tA 100 ms
tsd
I
Overload release
Short-time-delay overcurrent release
Safety margin
Operating current of the S-release
Prearcing time of the fuse
Delay time of the S-release
140
TIP04_13_063_EN
L
S
F1
tA 1 s
Q1
I
Overload limit
Ii
TIP04_13_064_EN
11
F1 Fuse
Q1 Circuit-breaker
L
Inverse-time delay overload release
I
Instantaneous electromagnetic overcurrent release
Safety margin
tA
Operating current of the I-release
Ii
The time-current characteristics (scatter bands) do not touch
Fig. 7/23: Selectivity between fuse and downstream
circuit-breaker for the overload range
Con
tents
Intro
duction
T1
Ir
Isd
Ii
Ik
Q2 L
S
I
=
600 A
= 3,000 A
= 12,000 A
10 kA
Q3 L
S
I
Ik 10 kA
Ikpart
Ir = 200 A
Ii = 2,400 A
Q1 L
I
10
11
Q1
F1
ISel
TIP04_13_129_EN
ISel
Single
Parallel
Q1
Q2 Q2+Q3
104
t in s
103
12
Ik
Base
Ikpart
13
102
101
14
S
100
tsd = 100 ms
( 70 ms)
Ii
10-1
10-2
102 2
4 6 103
104 2
4
3
TIP04_13_065_EN
Selectivity limit
6
I in A
back to
page 140
I2t
Q1
T2
Identical power
output
M
~
Miniature
circuitbreaker
F1
Q1
Ik
F1
back to
page 140
15
16
17
141
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
During parallel operation of three transformers, the selectivity conditions are in principle improved more than with
two units owing to the additionally achieved current selectivity, as the characteristic displacement factor is between
2and 3. Here, too, LS-releases are required in the feed-in
units to obtain unambiguous selectivity conditions for the
circuit-breaker.
5
6
7
Tie breakers must perform the following protection functions in fault situations:
Instantaneous release with faults in the vicinity of the
busbar
Relief of branch circuits of the effects of high total
short-circuit currents
9
10
11
12
13
T1
T2
T3
IkPart 1
L
Q1 S
I
15
Ik
< 15 kA
Q2
Ik
< 15 kA
Q3
15 kA
TIP04_13_066
17
142
Q2
Q3
Ik
15 kA
16
IkPart 2
Q1
TIP04_13_067_EN
14
Ik
< 30 kA
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Ikpart 1
Q4
Q2
Ikpart 2
Q3
Q1
Ikpart
Q5
3 Ikpart
Ik
Q2
Q4
Q3
Q5
2 Ikpart
Ik
Ikpart
TIP04_13_068_EN
Q1
Fig. 7/28: Splitting of short-circuit currents for the purpose of setting the overcurrent releases in the tie breakers Q4 and Q5 in case of
three feed-in units and faults a and b in the outgoing circuit of different busbar sections
14
15
16
17
143
Con
tents
Intro
duction
If a short circuit occurs at K1 (Fig. 7/29a), the rated operating voltage Ue drops to 0.13 Ue at the busbar of the
sub-distribution board and to 0.5 Ue at the busbar of the
main distribution board. The nearest upstream circuit-
breaker Q1 clears the fault. Depending on the size and type
of the circuit-breaker, the total breaking time is up to 30ms
for zero-current interrupters and a maximum of 10ms for
current-limiting circuit-breakers.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Q3
12
0.13 Ue
0.5 Ue
13
Q2
tv
100 ms
14
0.13 Ue
15
80 m
3 95 mm2 Cu
Q1
16
Q2
Main
distribution
board
K2
Subdistribution
board
Q1
tv = 0
K1
Ue
tv
17
Fig. 7/29: Voltage conditions for short-circuited low-voltage switchgear installation with a main and sub-distribution board
144
TIP04_13_069_EN
Q3
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
Node fuses
The nodes of a meshed low-voltage system are normally
equipped with cables of the same cross section and with
LVHRC fuses of operational class gG of the same type and
rated current (Fig. 7/30).
If a short circuit (K1) occurs along the meshed system
cable, the short-circuit currents Ik3 and Ik4 flow to the fault
location. Short-circuit current Ik3 from node a comprises
the partial currents Ik1 and Ik2 which may differ greatly
depending on the impedance ratios.
6
7
8
9
10
11
Ik1 F1
F2
Ik2
12
Ik3 + Ik4
13
K1
Ik
Ik4
14
Ik
Fig. 7/30: Short-circuited cable with its two feed-in nodes a and b
TIP04_13_071
Ik
TIP04_13_070
15
16
17
145
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
K3
11
K2
12
a
13
K1
14
15
c
16
17
a HV HRC fuses
b LV circuit-breaker with I2t
characteristic in the S-release
c Node fuses
TIP04_13_072_EN
146
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Short-circuit protection
Reactor-connected capacitors
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
147
Con
tents
Intro
duction
HV HRC fuses
Circuit-breakers
If more frequent switching is required and for transformers
rated 630kVA and higher, we recommend protection by
circuit-breakers. This is often specified by the DSO for the
consumer substation as well.
6
7
Protection relays
Protection relays connected to current transformers (protection core) can perform all protection-related tasks
irrespective of the magnitude of the short-circuit currents
and rated operating currents of the required
circuit-breakers.
8
9
Digital protection
10
Modern protection equipment is controlled by microprocessors (digital protection) and supports all of the protection
functions required for a medium-voltage branch circuit.
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
148
Overcurrent protection
To make overcurrent protection of cables and transformer
branch circuits future-proof, all phases of those circuits,
usually 3phases, shall be equipped with current transformers. The neutral-point connection of the medium-
voltage network must be considered here.
Relay operating currents with emergency generator
operation
Care should be taken to ensure that the operating currents
of the protection relays provided for normal system operation are also attained in the event of faults during emergency operation using generators with relatively low rated
outputs.
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
It is acceptable for the prearcing time/current characteristics F2 (LVHRC) and F3 (HV HRC) referred to 0.4kV to
touch or intersect, and the switch disconnector to be
possibly tripped on the high-voltage side by the upstream
HV HRC fuse, since both fuses protect the same system
element and interruption will occur in all cases (limited
selectivity). HV HRC fuses with higher rated currents (for
example 80A as shown in Fig. 7/34) would not be suitable
here, since their lowest breaking current Iamin does not
have a safety margin of 25% at minimum below the
short-circuit current Ik which the transformer lets through
(maximum 10.5kA).
A non-selective fuse response, as demonstrated in the
example of the 50A HV HRC fuse towards the 630A lowvoltage fuse (Fig. 7/34) may result in damage of unblown
fuse-links in case of faults in the low-voltage busbar, so
that the tripping characteristic is changed and the fuse may
trip at any time under any load even below its rated
current. In the event of protection tripping by the HV HRC
fuse, or the low-voltage fuse, both fuse links should always
be replaced altogether. This applies to all descriptions
below and the examples given for HV HRC fuses, where
non-selective protection at the transformers low-voltage
7/37
Fig. 7/35 to Fig. 7/37).
side is provided (Fig.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
149
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Requirements
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Requirements
The two feed-in circuit-breakers in Fig. 7/38 to Fig. 7/41
form a functional unit and must be selectively graded
towards the protection devices at the low-voltage side.
DMT protection
Nowadays, digital devices are used to provide DMT protection in practically all applications. They have broader setting ranges, allow a choice between definite-time and
inverse-time overcurrent protection or overload protection,
provide a greater and more consistent level of measuring
accuracy and are self-monitoring.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
150
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
151
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
Ik min prim =
= 10kV/0.4kV = 25
Ik min prim288 A
Ik min prim667 A
10
11
Ik min prim=210 A
12
13
14
15
16
17
152
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
10 kV
3GD 50 A
t
min
TIP04_13_081_EN
3GD
50 A
100
2
3
4
400 kVA
ukr 6 %
Ik < 10.5 kA
0.4 kV
10
7
8
Ia min
25 % Safety margin
10
IRush
ms
0.1
11
20 % Safety margin
12
13
0.01
1,000
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
10,000
2,000 3,000
80
120
I in A at 0.4 kV
400
800
100,000
14
50,000
15
2,000
Fig. 7/33: Example for dimensioning a HV HRC fuse acc. to the minimum breaking current of the HV HRC fuse and
the energizing current of the transformer
16
back to page 149
17
153
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1.000
10 kV
F3
3GD 50 A
3GD 80 A
min
3
4
F2
3NA 630 A
100
F3
F1
3NA 400 A
5
6
TIP04_13_082_EN
3GD
50 A
(80 A)
400 kVA
ukr 6 %
F2
10
3NA
630 A
0.4 kV
7
F1
8
Ia min
3NA
400 A
Ik< 10.5 kA
25 % Safety margin
is not observed!
10
0.1
ms
11
12
13
0.01
1,000
14
15
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
16
17
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
50,000
2,000
Fig. 7/34: Example of grading HV HRC fuses LVHRC fuses in the branch circuit and a 400 kVA transformer
154
100,000
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
TIP04_13_083_EN
1
10 kV
min
F2
3GD 80 A
F2
Base Ik < 16.4 kA
Q1
3WL 1,000 A
100
I2t Characteristic
Q1
3GD
80 A
2
3
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
3WL
1,000 A
tsd 300 ms
0.4 kV
F1
3NA 315 A
10
F1
3NA
315 A
7
8
Ik < 16.4 kA
1
tsd
ms
10
0.1
11
12
13
0.01
1,000
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
14
50,000
2,000
I
15
16
Fig. 7/35: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 and downstream LVHRC fuse F1 in the
branch circuit
17
155
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
10 kV
2
min
3
4
Q1
3WL 1,000 A
I4t Characteristic
100
F2
3GD 80 A
F2
3GD
80 A
5
6
TIP04_13_084_EN
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
Q1
3WL 1,000 A
Isd 4,000 A
tsd 300 ms
0.4 kV
F1
3NA
315 A
F1
3NA 400 A
10
7
8
Ik < 16.4 kA
1
tsd
10
ms
11
0.1
12
13
0.01
1,000
14
15
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
50,000
2,000
I
16
17
Fig. 7/36: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q1 (optional I4t characteristic of the L-release)
and downstream LVHRC fuse F1 in the branch circuit
156
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
TIP04_13_085_EN
1
10 kV
min
F2
3GD 80 A
F2
Q2
3WL 1,000 A
I2t Characteristic
100
Q1
3WL 630 A
I2t Characteristic
Q2
10
s
Q1
3GD
80 A
2
3
4
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
3WL 1,000 A
Isd 4,000 A
tsd 300 ms
0.4 kV
5
6
3WL 630 A
Isd 2,500 A
tsd 200 ms
7
8
Ik < 16.4 kA
1
tsd2
10
ms
tsd1
11
0.1
12
13
0.01
1,000
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
tsd1
tsd2
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
14
50,000
2,000
Fig. 7/37: Example of grading a HV HRC fuse F2 with circuit-breaker Q2 and downstream circuit-breaker Q1 with
an LSI-release in the branch circuit
15
16
back to page 149
17
157
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
10 kV
Q3
100
Q2
3WL 1,000 A
I2t Characteristic
66 A/500 ms
810 A/50 ms
I>
I>>
60/1 A
min
TIP04_13_086_EN
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
3WL 1,000 A
Isd 4,000 A
tsd 300 ms
Q2
0.4 kV
3WL 630 A
Isd 1,260 A
tsd 200 ms
Q1
6
s
10
F1
3NA
160 A
Ik < 16.4 kA
Ik < 16.4 kA
Q3
I> / t>
9
10
tsd2
ms
11
F1
3NA 160 A
0.1
Q3
I>> / t>>
12
13
0.01
1,000
14
15
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
tsd2
t> / t>>
16
17
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
50,000
2,000
I
Fig. 7/38: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), 3WL circuit-breaker, 1,000 A with
back to page
LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits, e.g. with LVHRC fuse 160 A (F1), in a transformer branch circuit supplying 630 kVA
158
150
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
10 kV
Q3
min
Q1
3WL 630 A
I2t Characteristic
100
Q2
3WL 1,000 A
Isd 4,000 A
tsd 300 ms
0.4 kV
3WL 630 A
Isd 1,260 A
tsd 200 ms
Q1
10
s
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
66 A/500 ms
810 A/50 ms
I>
I>>
60/1 A
TIP04_13_087_EN
F1
3NA
160 A
6
7
Ik < 16.4 kA
Ik < 16.4 kA
8
Q3
I> / t>
9
tsd2
10
ms
tsd1
0.1
11
Q3
I>> / t>>
12
13
0.01
1,000
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
tsd1
tsd2
t> / t>>
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
14
50,000
2,000
Fig. 7/39: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), 3WL circuit-breaker, 1,000 A with LSI-release back to page 150
(Q2) and downstream branch circuits with 3WL circuit-breaker, 630A, LSI-release (Q1), in a transformer branch circuit supplying 630 kVA
15
16
17
159
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
Q3
Ith
0 % Preload
100 % Preload
2
min
3
4
10 kV
Q3
Q2
3WL 1,000 A
I2t Characteristic
100
42 A
210 A/500 ms
810 A/50 ms
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
Ith
I>
I>>
60/1 A
F1
3NA 315 A
3WL 1,000 A
Isd 4,000 A
tsd 300 ms
0.4 kV
3WL 630 A
Isd 2,560 A
tsd 200 ms
Q1
TIP04_13_088_EN
10
F1
3NA
315 A
Ik < 16.4 kA
Ik < 16.4 kA
8
Q3
I> / t>
9
10
tsd2
ms
11
0.1
Q3
I>> / t>>
12
13
0.01
1,000
14
15
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
tsd2
t> / t>>
16
17
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
50,000
2,000
Fig. 7/40: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection and overload protection (Q3), 3WL circuit-breaker, back to page 151
1,000 A with LSI-release (Q2) and downstream branch circuits with LVHRC fuse 315 A (F1), in a transformer branch circuit supplying 630 kVA
160
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
min
Q3
Ith
0 % Preload
100 % Preload
10 kV
Q3
Q2
3WL 1,000 A
I2t Characteristic
100
Ith
I>
I>>
60/1 A
42 A
210 A/500 ms
810 A/50 ms
TIP04_13_089_EN
1
2
3
630 kVA
ukr 6 %
Q1
3WL 630 A
I2t Characteristic
3WL 1,000 A
Isd 4,000 A
tsd 300 ms
Q2
5
0.4 kV
Q1
10
F1
3NA
315 A
3WL 630 A
Isd 2,560 A
tsd 200 ms
6
7
Ik < 16.4 kA
Ik < 16.4 kA
8
Q3
I> / t>
tsd2
10
ms
tsd1
11
Q3
I>> / t>>
0.1
12
13
0.01
1,000
A at 0.4 kV
1,000
A at 10 kV
40
ts
tsd1
tsd2
t> / t>>
10,000
I in A at 0.4 kV
120
200
400
800
100,000
50,000
2,000
I
Fig. 7/41: Example of grading a circuit-breaker with DMT protection (Q3), 3WL circuit-breaker, 1,000 A with LSI-release back to page 150
(Q2) and downstream branch circuits with 3WL circuit-breaker, 630A, LSI-release (Q1), in a transformer branch circuit supplying 630 kVA
14
15
16
17
161
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
The thermistor-type thermal protection protects the transformer against overheating resulting from increased
ambient temperatures or overloading. Furthermore, it
allows the full output of the transformer to be utilised
irrespective of the number of load cycles without the risk
ofdamage to the transformer.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
162
Chapter 8
Medium-Voltage Switching Devices
and Switchgear
8.1 Medium-Voltage Switchgear
8.2 Medium-Voltage Switching Devices
8.3 Medium-Voltage Protection
165
175
185
Con
tents
Intro
duction
8 M
edium-Voltage Switching Devices and
Switchgear
According to international rules, there are only two voltage
levels:
Low voltage (LV): up to and including 1kVAC
(or 1.5kVDC)
High voltage (HV): above 1kVAC
(or 1.5kVDC)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
TIP04_13_090_EN
12
13
14
220 kV
15
High voltage
52 kV
16
Medium voltage
Medium
voltage
1 kV
Low voltage
17
Fig. 8/1: Voltage levels between the power plant and the consumer
164
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Power generation
and high-voltage
grid
Medium-voltage
grid
Main substation
Secondaryunit
substation
Consumer substation
Secondary
distribution level
TIP04_13_091_EN
Primary
distribution level
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Low-voltage grid
Fig. 8/2: Structure of the voltage and power distribution levels
165
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
Any selection
for example switchgear type, switching devices and their
operating mechanisms, busbar circuitry, compartments
and partitions, operational availability, internal arc
qualification
Tab. 8/1 gives an overview of the configuration parameters
and characteristics which may play a part in the planning.
The most important aspects are presented in more detail
below.
5
6
7
Selection parameter
Determinants
Ur Rated voltage
Line voltage
Insulation coordination
Neutral-point connection
8
9
Altitude
Environmental influences (pollution)
Rated withstand capacity
Grid characteristics
Ip Peak current
IK Short-time current
tK Short-circuit duration
Selectivity criteria
10
11
12
Busbar circuit
13
14
15
Busbar
Ambient temperature
Feeder circuits
Reserves/service continuity
Selection parameter
Determinants
Single/Double busbar
System configuration
Operational procedures
Embedded or in-plant power generation, emergency power supply
Power quality (unsteady loads)
Operational procedures
Switching
device
16
17
166
Selection parameter
Determinants
Circuit-breaker
Switch
Contactor
Switching frequency
HV HRC fuse
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Selection parameter
Determinants
Circuit-breaker panel
Switch panel
Switching devices
Type of construction
Extendable panels
Grid protection
Block type
1
2
3
Insulation medium
Determinants
Air (AIS)
Gas (GIS)
5
6
Encapsulation
Disconnector
Determinants
Withdrawable unit/truck
Switching frequency
Disconnector (fixed-mounted)
Selection parameter
Determinants
Degree of protection
(IP in accordance with IEC60529, VDE0470-1)
Environmental conditions
Personal safety
A or B (type of accessibility)
Building
9
10
11
Selection parameter
Determinants
Operational procedures
LSC 1
Operating, working
LSC 2
Maintenance requirements
LSC 2A
Servicing/Maintenance
LSC 2B
Interlocking
Personnel qualification
Tools
12
13
14
15
16
Partition class
PM (partition of metal)
PI (partition of insulating material)
17
167
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Outgoing feeder components
2
3
4
5
Selection parameter
Determinants
Cable connection
Termination: conventional/plug
Switching task
Number of cables
Cable/overhead line
Altitude
Surge arrester
Voltage transformer
Grid protection
Metering, counting
Current transformer
Control
Neutral earthing
Operational procedures
Class E0, E1 or E2
Busbar
components
6
7
Secondary equipment
8
9
10
11
Selection parameter
Determinants
Measuring transducer
Earthing switch
Operational procedures
Class E0, E1 or E2
Surge arrester
Selection parameter
Determinants
Protection relays
Electromagnetic compatibility
Tab. 8/1: Overview of the rated values and selection parameters for the configuration of medium-voltage switchgear
12
8.1.3 Medium-Voltage Switchgear Design
13
14
15
16
17
168
Operator protection
The gas-insulated switchgear is safe to touch thanks to its
earthed metal enclosure
HV HRC fuses and cable terminations are only accessible
if branch circuits are earthed
Operation is only possible if the enclosure is fully sealed
(and any doors closed)
A maintenance-free pressure absorption system, laid out
as special cooling system reduces pressure-related and
thermal impacts of an arc fault so that personnel and
Fig. 8/3).
8/3
building will be safe (Fig.
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1,000
3
4
2,000
890
2,300
1,000
775
828
Standard for
circuit-breaker panels
10
2 Pressure-relief opening
2
3
3 Room height
2,400
1,000
2,400
Switchgear room
1
1 Low-voltage cubicle
Switchgear room
4 Panel depth
5 Operator aisle
300
115
> 600
2
Cable basement
~200
12
834
Cable basement
6
7
12 Depth of pressure
absorption canal behind
switchgear panel
200
620
200
11 Height of pressure
absorption canal base
beneath the switchgear panel
15
15
Side view
Side view
11
Top view
Top view
Fig. 8/3: Room layout for switchgear with pressure relief downward (left) and with pressure absorption duct
TIP04_13_092_EN
50
50
620
10
Expandability
Installation site
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
169
Con
tents
Operator aisle
500 mm
TIP04_13_093_EN
800 mm
Intro
duction
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Accessibility of compartments
13
14
15
16
17
500 mm
Mounting aisle
Escape route 20 m
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Category of service
continuity
Type of construction
LSC 1
LSC 2A
LSC 2B
LSC 2
4
5
Busbar space
Busbar space
Busbar space
Disconnector
space
Switch space
Busbars, switches
and termination
space
LSC 1
Busbar space
Termination space
LSC 2
Busbar space
Switch and
termination space
LSC 2A
Busbar space
Switch and
termination space
LSC 2A
10
Busbar space
11
Switch space
Switch space
12
Termination space
LSC 2A
Switch and
termination space
LSC 2A
Single busbar
A single busbar is sufficient for most supply tasks, even if
this supply task consists of two incoming feeders. It is
straightforward and easy to handle, which reduces the
likelihood of switching faults. When fault-affected switching operations happen, circuit-breakers only must be
operated. If the wrong breaker should be operated inad-
Termination space
LSC 2B
Termination
space
TIP04_13_094_EN
Switch space
LSC 2B
back to page 170
vertently, this would not have any safety-relevant consequences in the switchgear, since circuit-breakers are capable of making and breaking all load and short-circuit currents, even under earth-fault and other fault conditions.
In case of more intense branching (rule of thumb: more
than five feeders), the single busbar can be subdivided
13
14
15
16
17
171
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
Double busbar
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
172
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Bus sectionalizer
3
TIP04_13_095_EN
BCT
Fig. 8/6: Duplicate busbar with bus sectionalizer and busbar coupler, transversal (BCT)
4
5
Pressure calculation according to Pigler for the 8DJ/H switchgear type without absorber
TIP04_13_096_EN
12
10
8
6
10
100
200
m3):
300
400
50
1
16
500
600
700
800
900
Time t (in ms)
1,000
Fig. 8/7: Example of stationary excess pressures resulting from internal arc faults
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
173
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 For any information or requests in this matter, please turn to your TIP contact:
siemens.com/tip-cs/contact
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
174
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
175
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Insulation
level
Voltage
Operating
current
Circuit-breakers
Switch (disconnector)
Disconnector
Earthing switch
Make-proof earthing
switch
Contactor
Fuse link
13
Fuse base
Surge arrester*
14
15
Surge current
Breaking current
Short-circuit
breaking current
Short-circuit
making current
2)
1)
1)
3)
4)
Bushing
6)
5)
6)
Selection parameter
1) Limited short-circuit breaking capacity
2) Applicable as selection parameter in special cases only, e.g. for exceptional pollution layer
3) For surge arresters with spark gap = rated voltage
4) Rated discharge current for surge arresters
5) For surge arresters short-circuit strength when there is an overload
6) For bushings and insulators: minimum failing loads for tension, bending, and torsion
16
* Further selection criteria for surge arresters may also be: Residual voltage, rated discharge current, energy absorption capability, short-circuit strength (general),
rated and continuous voltage (metal-oxide arrester), rated and response voltage (arrester with spark gap)
17
(Parameters of the secondary equipment for drives, control and monitoring are not taken into consideration in this table.)
176
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
177
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
Ima
Isc
Ir
Ik
Ian
Switching
operation
Load case
cos
Current
Main problem
Comments
Switch
Contactor
Disconnector
Switch-disconnector
Earthing switch
Fuse
Circuit-breaker
Transformers
Non-loaded
<0.3
0.03 Ir
Loaded
0.71.0
Ir
Normally no protection
circuitry necessary
Overloaded
0.71.0
1.2 Ir
Normally no protection
circuitry necessary
Inrush
0.15
15 Ir
Current breaking up to
15 Ir with cos0.15
overvoltage possible
2 Ir
High switching
frequency
0.15
300 A
0.15
2,000 A
Transient recovery
voltage with steep
edge
6 kV/ms
8
9
10
11
12
0.20.9
Furnace
transformer
13
Earth-fault coils
14
Compensating
coils
15
Motors
16
In operation
0.80.9
Ir
Starting
0.20.3
7 Ir
Current breaking up to
7 Ir with cos0.3
Normally no protection
circuitry necessary
0.81.0
Ir
Transient recovery
voltage with steep
edge
Overvoltage protection is
common
Ir
Overvoltage protection is
common
Generators
Power converter
transformer
17
0.11.0
178
Con
tents
Intro
duction
4
5
6
7
Switch-disconnector
Earthing switch
Fuse
Comments
Disconnector
Main problem
Contactor
Current
Switch
cos
Circuit-breakers
Switching operation
Capacitor banks
capacitive
1.4 Ir
Filter circuits
capacitive
1,000 A
11
100 Ir
Permissible making
current:
High amplitude and
5kA: for NXACT
steep edge of the mak- vacuum circuit-breaker
ing current
10kA: for 3AH vacuum
circuit-breaker
>10 kA: Reactor required
12
Unloaded cables
capacitive
100 A
10 A
13
capacitive
capacitive
20 A
8
9
10
14
15
16
17
179
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Ir
Ir
Unloaded cables
Fuse
0.3 inductive
Ring separations
Earthing switch
Comments
Switch-disconnector
Main problem
Disconnector
Current
Contactor
cos
Switch
Switching operation
Circuit-breaker
2
3
4
5
6
11
Ima
Terminal short
circuit
0.15
inductive
Isc
12
Isc
Transient recovery
voltage with steep edge
6 kV/ms
Short interruption
0.15
inductive
Isc
13
Transformer-fed
short circuit
0.15
inductive
Isc
Transient recovery
voltage with steep edge
4 kV/ms
14
Short circuit
current limiting
coils
0.15
inductive
Isc
Transient recovery
voltage with steep edge
10 kV/ms
0.15
inductive
0.87 Isc
15
Stalling motors
0.2
inductive
6 Ir
Current breaking
up to 6 Ir with cos0.3
16
Phase opposition
17
0.15
inductive
0.25 Isc
180
Fuse
0.15
inductive
10
Activation
Earthing switch
Comments
Switch-disconnector
Main problem
Disconnector
Current
Contactor
cos
Switch
Switching
operation
Circuit-breaker
Con
tents
Intro
duction
variable
Ir
Ir
Fuse
5 A
capacitive
Earthing switch
Switch-disconnector
Comments
Disconnector
Main problem
Contactor
Current
Switch
cos
Circuit-breakers
Switching operation
2
3
4
5
6
Switch-over in <150ms
Fuse
Ir
Earthing switch
Rapid switch-over
Ir
Switch-disconnector
Comments
Disconnector
Protection disconnecting
circuitry
(disconnecting under load)
Main problem
Contactor
Current
Switch
cos
Circuit-breaker
Switching operation
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
181
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Circuit-breakers
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Class
12
13
17
M2
E1
26 C
26 C
4 C
4 C
130 O
130 O
8 O
6 O
10% Isc
30% Isc
60% Isc
100% Isc
C1
24 O
24 O
C2
24 O
128 O
S1
S2
Circuit-breaker for use in overhead line networks, or in a cable network with direct overhead line connection (without
a cable between overhead line and breaker)
16
Switches
E2
15
Description
M1
14
Backfiring-free off-switching
in 2 out of 3 test series
182
Con
tents
Intro
duction
SF6 switches are appropriate when the switching frequency is 1time per month. These switches are usually
classified as E3 with regard to their electrical endurance
Air or hard-gas switches
are only useful with switching frequencies 1time per
year. These switches are simpler and usually belong to
the E1 class. Versions belonging to Class E2 are in
between in terms of their switching frequency
Vacuum switches
Their performance is significantly above that of the
M2/E3 classes. They are used for special tasks mostly in
industrial supply systems or when the switching
frequency is 1time per week
Disconnectors
Disconnectors do not have any switching capacity. Disconnectors up to 52kV may only switch negligible currents up
to 500mA (for example voltage transformers) or larger
currents only when there is an insignificant voltage difference (e.g. for a busbar change with activated BCT). According to IEC62271-102 (VDE0671-102), only the classes for
the mechanical switching cycles were therefore defined
(Tab. 8/12).
2
3
4
Earthing switches
Class
Description
M1
Mechanical endurance
M2
E1
10 Iload
10 Iloop
2 Ima
20 0.05 Iload
E2
30 Iload
20 Iloop
5 Ima
E3
100 Iload
20 Iloop
5 Ima
C1
C
C2
10 Icc
10 0.02 to 0.04 Icc
10 IIc
10 Ief1
10 Ief2
10
10
10
10
Icc
Ilc
Isc
Ibb
Additionally 10times each
0.1 0.4 Icc, Isb, Ibb
8
Test currents:
Iload rated network load breaking current
Iloop rated ring breaking current
Icc rated cable breaking current
Ilc rated overhead line breaking current
Isb rated capacitor breaking current
Ibb rated parallel capacitor breaking
current
Ief1 rated earth-fault breaking current
Ief2 rated cable and overhead line breaking
current under earth-fault conditions
Ima rated short-circuit making current
Class
10
11
12
Description
M0
M1
M2
13
Description
E0
E1
E2
14
15
16
17
183
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Contactors
IEC62271-106 (VDE0671106) has not defined any endurance classes for contactors yet. Commonly used contactors
have a mechanical and electrical endurance in the range of
250,000 to 1,000,000 switching cycles. They are used
wherever switching operations are performed very frequently, for example > 1time per hour. The standard
specifies two classes, C1 and C2, for the probability of
restrikes:
Class C1 (low probability of restrikes): up to 5 cummulated restrikes are permitted during the breaking of capacitive currents
Class C2 (very low probability of restrikes): no restrikes
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
184
Con
tents
Intro
duction
4
5
6
Modular design
8
9
10
Measuring
inputs
Current
inputs
(100 IN, 1 s)
I/O ports
FibreV.24
Serial optics
interfaces
Input
filter
Binary
inputs
11
Fault
signalling relay
Amplifier
12
13
Command relay
100 V/1 A,
5 A analog
A / D signal
transducer
Processor
system
0001
0101
0011
Storage:
RAM
EEPROM
EPROM
digital
10 V
analog
I/O devices
Displays
TIP04_13_073_EN
14
Voltage
inputs
(140 V
continuous)
I/O contacts
15
16
17
185
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Holistic workflow
4
5
6
7
8
Modular system design in hardware, software, and communications perfectly tailored to user needs
Functional integration of a great variety of applications
such as protection, control, measuring, power quality or
fault recording
Identical extension and communication modules for all
device members in the family
Innovative terminal technology ensures easy mounting
and replaceability combined with maximum safety
Identical functions throughout the entire system family,
for example an identical automatic reclosing function of
the 7SD8, 7SA8, 7SL8 line protection devices, reduce the
training expense, thus enhancing the safety
All functions can be individually edited and adapted to
user requirements
Innovations are available to all devices at the same time
and can easily be retrofitted via libraries if required
10
11
12
13
14
Designed to communicate
15
16
17
186
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Designed to communicate
Open and scalable architecture for IT integration and new
functions
Latest communication and cybersecurity standards
implemented
Smart functions, for example for power system operation, fault or power quality analyses (power system
monitoring, power control unit, fault localisation)
Integrated automation using optimised logic modules
based on IEC61131-3
High-precision detection and processing of process
parameters and transmission to other components in the
smartgrid
Protection, automation, and monitoring in the smartgrid
3
4
tagtag,perm
6
7
tagtthr
Safety coordination
The tripping characteristics and associated settings of the
protection device must be carefully matched to attain
selectivity. The main goal is to disconnect the faulty component as fast as possible, keeping the remaining network
in operation so that interruptions of supply will be minimised and the network stability is not put at risk. Protection
should be set as sensitive as possible in order to be able to
detect faults even with the least possible current intensity.
At the same time, it should remain stable under the permitted load, overload, and let-through conditions.
fB IB,max I>
Ik,min
fLB
Where
IB,max=Maximum operating current
fB,max=Safety factor to allow for influences caused by
operational changes and variations such as load
changes, operation under faulted loads, transducer
faults, relay resetting ratio; for example fB,max=1.7
for cables, fB,max=2.0 for transformers1)
8
9
10
Time-overcurrent protection
1) When
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
187
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
a)
b)
c)
11
DMT
12
DMT
DMT
t = 600 ms
13
DMT
14
DMT
15
t = 0 ms
16
17
188
TIP04_13_169_EN
t = 300 ms
Both the high-current level I>> and the overcurrent level I>
always work with a current-independent tripping delay
time (DMT). Different tripping characteristics can be set for
Fig. 8/13
8/13)
the IDMTL function (Ip level). The characteristics (Fig.
are described by characteristic formulas (Tab. 8/14). The
characteristic curve types for relay tripping times required
in IEC60255-151 (VDE0435-3151) are identified by the
lettersA, B, C, D, E, and F.
Depending on the protection relay design, the directional
XDMT protection function (XDMT representing IDMTL or
DMT) can determine the direction of current flow from the
phase displacement of current and voltage. In relation to
this, it provides additional directional high-current and
overcurrent levels. This allows setting different current
thresholds and delay times for both directions (see
chapter 4). Main applications are parallel lines as well
aslines supplied from both sides.
Directional time-overcurrent protection using directional
XDMT relays is applied for lines supplied from both ends, as
they occur in double spur lines and in closed ring networks.
For this purpose, protection is graded device against
device beginning at the two feed-in units. At each of the
outer ends, a non-directional XDMT relay is sufficient.
0.14
t=
Tp
0.02 1
0.14
= (I / Ip)0.02 relays
Tp
Dependent time response fort overcurrent
0.14
(I
/
I
)
1
p
t=
Tp
0.02 1
0.14
(I
/
I
)
A: Inverse
0.14
p
=
Tp
0.14
ttt=
0.02
= (I/ /13.5
Tpp
11 T
0.02
IIIpp)))0.02
t =(I
T
(I / 13.5
1
p
p
t = (I / Ip) 1 Tp
13.5
t = (I / Ip) 1 Tp
B: Greatly inverse
(I 13.5
/13.5
I p) 1 T
t
=
13.5
tt =
= (I/ /I80
Tpp
Ip)) 11 T
t = (I
Tpp
(I / I80
p
p)2 1
t = (I / Ip)2 1 Tp
80
t = (I / Ip)2 1 Tp
C: Extremely inverse
(I / 80
I80
p) 1 T
t
=
80
tt =
= (I(I/ /IIp))22211 T
Tpp
(I / Ipp)0.0515
1 p
t=
+ 0.114 Tp
0.02
0.0515
t = (I / Ip)0.02 1 + 0.114 Tp
D: IEEE moderately inverse
0.0515
t = (I / Ip)0.02 1 + 0.114 Tp
/0.0515
I p)
1 + 0.114 T
= (I 0.0515
0.0515
ttt=
0.02 1+
= (I(I/ /IIp))0.02
+ 0.114
0.114 T
Tppp
0.02
(I / 19.61
Ipp)
1
1
E: IEEE very inverse
t=
+ 0.491 Tp
2
19.61
t = (I / Ip)2 1 + 0.491 Tp
19.61
(I
/
I
)
1
p
t=
+ 0.491 T
/19.61
Ip)2 1 + 0.491 Tp
= (I 19.61
19.61
ttt=
+
2
= (I(I/ /IIp))22 11+ 0.491
0.491 T
Tppp
F: IEEE extremely inverse
(I / Ipp28.2
) 1
t=
+ 0.1217 Tp
2
28.2
t = (I / Ip)2 1 + 0.1217 Tp
28.2
(I
/
I
)
1
p
t=
+ 0.1217 T
t tripping time
fault
/28.2
I28.2
)2 1 + 0.1217 Tp
pcurrent
= II (I
28.2
Tp set value of time multiplicator
current
set value
ttt=
+
2
p
= (I(I/ /IIp))22 11+ 0.1217
0.1217 T
Tppp
(I / Ipp) 1
Tab. 8/14: Formulas for tripping characteristics acc. to
IEC60255151 (VDE0435-3151)
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Differential protection
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
2
100
t in s
TIP04_13_171_EN
TIP04_13_170_EN
t in s
500
10
200
5
100
2
10
I>
Ip
IDMTL
11
50
tp
5
20
DMT
T>
I >>
T >>
2
I >>
0.1
12
10
T >>
0.01
0.5
Extremely inverse
IEEE extremely
inverse
0.2
2
2
103
5
I in A
104
0.1
14
IEEE moderately
inverse
Greatly inverse
IEEE very inverse
13
Inverse
0.001
102
10
20
50
100
I / Ip
Fig. 8/13: Tripping characteristics
acc. to IEC60255-151 (VDE04353151)
15
16
17
189
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
Due to its strict selectivity, differential protection is generally set as instantaneous main protection, since no other
protection measure can disconnect the line more quickly
and selectively. Every 7SD610 compares the locally measured current values with the measured values of the opposite end and decides autonomously whether a line fault is
present or not. A communication link is required to exchange measured values between the two devices.
7
8
9
Busbar protection
In switchgear installations, busbars are the places where
the highest energy levels are concentrated. They are subject to a tremendous short-circuit load, as for reasons of
selectivity the high short-circuit and earth-fault currents
10
11
a)
12
b)
c)
d)
87L
I
13
Communication
link
87T
M/G
87M/
87G
14
I
I
15
87G
87L
TIP04_13_172_EN
16
Fig. 8/14: Block diagrams for a) line differential protection
b) transformer differential protection (SrT > 10MVA)
c) motor/generator differential protection (PrM > 2MW/PrG > 1MW)
d) generator blocking protection (PrG > 1MW)
17
190
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Distance protection
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Feed-in
Earth
L1
L2
L3
Distance protection
I>
t > = 0.9 s
Blocking
L1 Earth
L2 Earth
14
L3 Earth
I>
t > = 0.3 s
I>
t > = 0.3 s
F1
12
13
F2
I>
t > = 0.3 s
11
L1 L2
15
L2 L3
L3 / L1
Ring line
TIP04_13_173_EN
TIP04_13_174_EN
16
17
191
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
192
Chapter 9
Transformers
9.1 Electrical Design
194
9.2 Losses and Profitability Estimates
197
9.3 Construction of Oil-immersed
Transformers199
9.4 GEAFOL Cast-resin Dry-type
Transformers201
9.5 Power Converter Transformer
203
9.6 FITformer REG Regulated
Distribution Transformer
204
9.7 Transformer Operation
206
9.8 Transformer Room
209
Con
tents
Intro
duction
9 Transformers
Transformers are an essential component for power transmission and distribution. Their ratings originate from their
area of application, their construction, the nominal power
and the transformation ratio. Transformer types range from
generator transformers to distribution transformers.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
194
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ur
Ur /3
10
Ur
11
3
Ur
Ur
Ur
Star connection
Delta connection
Zigzag connection
Ir
Ir
3
13
Ir
Ir
w
3
12
Ir
3
w/3
w/3
Ir
Ir
Ur
w
Rated current
Rated voltage
Number of windings
14
15
16
TIP04_13_113_EN
17
195
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Yy0
0
I
iii
ii
II
III
Yz5
7
8
9
I
iii
ii
10
11
12
13
14
II
III
Dy5
ii
III
iii
i
II
5
15
16
17
196
TIP04_13_114
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Capital cost Cc
q = p / 100 + 1
Cc = Cp r / 100
CP0 = Ce 8,760 h P0
CD = Cd (Pk + P0)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Transformers
197
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The short-circuit losses are converted to a reference temperature. For oil-immersed transformers this is 75C. For
cast-resin transformers these are:
A=80C
E=95C
B=100C
F=120C
H=145C
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
Beispiel: Verteilungstransformator
Abschreibungszeitraum
Zinssatz
n = 20 Jahre
p = 12 % p.a.
Strompreis
Ce = 0,25 / kWh
Leistungspreis
a = 0,8
A. Niederpreistransformator
B. Verlustoptimierter
Transformator
P0 = 19 kW
Leerlaufverluste
Pk = 167 kW
Lastverluste
Cp = 521.000 Kaufpreis
P0 = 16 kW
Leerlaufverluste
Pk = 124 kW
Lastverluste
C p = 585.000 Kaufpreis
Cc = 521.000 13,39
100
C c = 585.000 13,39
100
= 69.762 / Jahr
= 78.332 / Jahr
Abschreibungsfaktor r = 13,39
C P0 = 0,2 8.760 16
= 28.032 / Jahr
CPk = 0,2 8.760 0,64 124
= 139.039 / Jahr
= 65.100 / Jahr
= 49.000 / Jahr
11
355.404 / Jahr
294.403 / Jahr
12
Durch die Energieeinsparung durch den optimierten Verteilungstransformator in Hhe von 61.001 pro Jahr amortisiert sich der
hhere Anschaffungspreis in weniger als einem Jahr.
13
14
15
16
17
198
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Tank design
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
H
E
10
= length;
= width;
= height
= roller-to-roller centre spacing
11
12
1U
1V
1W
2N 2U 2V 2W
3
E
1 Oil drain
2 Thermometer well
3 Adjuster for off-circuit tap changer
4 Rating plate (moveable)
15
A
5 Earth connections
6 Pulling lug, 30 mm
7 Lashing lug
8 Filler tube
TIP04_13_115_EN
14
13
16
17
199
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
The design of the transformers depends on the requirements. For example, double-tank versions are available for
special requirements in protected water catchment areas
and versions with ultra-high interference reduction for use
in EMC-sensitive areas.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
1U
14
2
E
15
16
17
200
9
E
1V
1W
6
A
6
7
8
9
10
TIP04_13_116_EN
13
2N 2U 2V 2W
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Type of
transformer
Installation
Outdoor
Oil insulated
transformers
(O)1)
Indoor
Fire resistant
liquid insulated
transformers
(K) 1)
3
4
3m
7.5 m
5m
10 m
10 m
20 m
V 45,000 l
15 m
30 m
Liquid volume V
Safety measures
V 1,000 l
EI 60 resp. REI 60 3)
V > 1,000 l
EI 90 resp. REI 90 3)
or EI 60 resp. REI 60 3)
plus automatic fire-extinguishing appliance
5
6
7
8
9
Clearance 2)
G1
G2
1.5 m
7.5 m
V 3,800 l
4.5 m
15 m
10
all
Operating data
Safety measures
EI 60 resp. REI 60 3)
or automatic fire-extinguishing appliance
Indoor, without
enhanced protection 4)
Indoor, with enhanced
protection 4)
Outdoor
Dry-type
transformers
(A) 1)
Clearance 2)
Liquid volume V
Liquid volume V
Outdoor, without
enhanced protection 4)
EI 60 resp. REI 60 3)
or distances horizontal 1.5 m and vertical 3.0 m
F0
F1
Fire behaviour class
Indoor
Safety measures
F0
EI 60 resp. REI 60 3)
or distance horizontal 0.9 m and vertical 1.5 m
F1
Note: Sufficient space should be allowed for periodic cleaning of resin-encapsulated transformer windings, in order to
prevent possible electrical faults and fire hazard caused by deposited atmospheric pollution.
1)
Cooling medium identification (K, O) according to IEC 60076-2 (VDE 0532-76-2) resp. (A) according to IEC 60076-11 (VDE 053-76-11)
To visualise G1 and G2 see IEC 61936-1 (VDE 0101-1)
REI represents the bearing system (wall) whereas EI represents the non-load bearing system (wall) where R is the load bearing capacity,
E is the fire integrity, I is the thermal insulation and 60/90 refers to fire resistance time (EN 13501-2) in minutes
4) Enhanced protection means: tank rupture strength, tank pressure relief, low-current fault protection, high-current fault protection
5) Fire behaviour class according to IEC 60076-11 (VDE 0532-76-11)
2)
11
12
13
14
15
16
3)
17
Tab. 9/3: Fire protection measures for transformers in accordance with IEC 61936-1 (VDE 0101-1)
201
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Cast-resin transformers should at least meet the requirements C2 (Climate Category), E1 or E2 (Environment
Category), and F1 (Fire Safety Category) as defined in
IEC60076-11 (VDE0532-76-11) (see Tab. 9/4).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Category E0
Category E1
Category E2
Climate category
12
Category C1
Category C2
13
14
Category F0
Category F1
15
16
17
202
Con
tents
Intro
duction
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
R
L1
L1
Unetwork
L3
L2
U=
12
3~ AC
13
T
L3
Frequency converter
Three-phase motor
TIP04_13_117_EN
L2
14
15
Fig. 9/5: Block diagram for a three-phase drive with power converter transformer and 6-pulse bridge connection
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Transformers
203
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
204
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
1
2
3
N
5
6
1
2
7
N
9
10
11
2
N
TIP04_13_118
The connection basically consists of vacuum and air contactors, resistors, and a control unit. Its principle is that closing
a contactor activates a bypass. Then the current flows
through the bypass ("N") to ensure flawless switch-over of
the mechanical vacuum contactors (Fig. 9/7), switch-over
from "2" to "1"). This prevents the occurrence of undesired
voltage peaks or voltage dips during switch-over even
under nominal load. When the target position has been
reached, the contactor for the bypass is opened and thus
deactivated. The control is event-driven and rules out
internal faulty responses such as incorrect closing of a
vacuum contactor.
12
13
14
15
16
17
205
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Transformers are designed in such a manner that overtemperatures as permitted by regulations are not exceeded
during rated operation. The overtemperature in the winding, and in liquid-filled transformers also the cooling and
insulating liquid, is the difference between the part under
consideration and the temperature of the ambient air. For
ambient air, regulations specify maximum temperatures as
well as mean day and annual temperatures.
3
4
5
6
7
kept in mind here that the short-circuit losses can also more
than double compared to the short-circuit losses at nominal
load. Therefore, additional ventilation is a proven means for
covering peak loads as well as providing a reserve in case of
a transformer failure when transformers are operated in
parallel.
Notes for planning the low-voltage main distribution
system (LVMD) and transformers under overload:
Both the transformer feed-in circuit-breaker and the
connection between transformer and LVMD must be sized
for the increased nominal current! The short-circuit
currents do not rise (for short-circuit behaviour please
refer to the Appendix 17.1)
The busbars of the low-voltage switchgear must be
dimensioned for overload conditions
Transformer losses increase in square under overload
conditions (for example, 150% load results in approximately 225% transformer losses). Increased losses must
be considered in the calculation of the discharge air
volume for the transformer room!
Overload capability
In accordance with IEC60076-1 (VDE0532-76-1), transformer overloading is permitted if the specified values for
the coolant temperature are undershot. The calculation for
oil-immersed transformers is described in IEC60076-7
(VDE0532-76-7), respectively IEC60076-12
(VDE05327612) for GEAFOL transformers.
9
10
11
12
Overloading the transformer without exceeding the permitted winding temperature is temporarily possible even if the
previous continuous load was below the rated power, and
provided that the permitted overtemperatures have not yet
been reached despite overload.
13
Another transformer overloading option (performance-dependent up to about 50%) is fan blowing, this means a
forced flow of the external coolant. However, it must be
14
15
1)
16
17
206
Parallel operation
Parallel operation prevails if transformers are connected to
identical power supply systems both at their input and
output side. As a rule, transformers characterized by vector
groups with identical code numbers are suitable for parallel
operation. Conductor terminals of the same name (1U-1U,
2U-2U, 1V-1V, 2V-2V, 1W-1W, 2W-2W) must then be connected to each other. But it is also possible to operate
transformers in parallel with certain vector groups that
have different code numbers provided that the conductor
terminals are swapped accordingly. This is shown in Fig. 9/8
for transformers with vector groups in the common code
numbers 5 and 11.
In case of an identical transformation ratio, the total load is
distributed to the transformers connected in parallel proportional to the transformer outputs and inversely proportional to the short-circuit voltages. In case of identical input
voltages and different output voltages of two transformers
connected in parallel, a compensating current flows
through both transformers which is approximated as
follows:
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Icomp. tr. 1 =
u
ukr1 + ukr2
Sr1
Sr2
100
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1L1
1L2
1L3
1W
1V
1U
1W
5
2W 2V
1V
1U
1W
11
2U
2W 2V
1V
1U
1W
11
2U
2W 2V
1V
High voltage:
1L1, 1L2, 1L3
Low voltage:
2L1, 2L2, 2L3
Required code number 5
1U
11
2U
2W 2V
2U
2L1
2L2
2L3
12
1L1
1L2
1L3
1V
1U
11
2W 2V
1W
1V
1U
5
2U
2W 2V
1W
1V
1U
5
2U
2W 2V
1W
1V
2W 2V
13
High voltage:
1L1, 1L2, 1L3
Low voltage:
2L1, 2L2, 2L3
Required code number 11
1U
5
2U
10
11
Possible connections
1W
2U
14
15
2L1
2L2
2L3
Possible connections
16
TIP04_13_119_EN
17
Fig. 9/8: Possible connections for transformers operated in parallel with vector groups of code numbers 5 and 11
207
Con
tents
Intro
duction
In Example1 (Tab. 9/5), the smaller transformer unfortunately happens to carry the higher secondary voltage and
must therefore carry the higher total current. This means
for this example that with a compensating current of
25.6% only a load current of 74.4% is permitted in order
not to exceed the rated current of the smaller transformer 1
(corresponding to 100%). Consequently, the whole set of
transformers can only be operated at 74.4% of its cumulated power of 630+1,000=1,630kVA, which is
about1,213kVA.
2
3
4
Rated power
inkVA
Transformer 1
400
630
Transformer 2
390
1,000
u =
With a power factor for the load below 0.9, this estimate
suggests a sufficiently precise guide value. With a power
factor greater than 0.9, the permissible cumulated power
rises due to the then growing vectorial difference value.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
208
400 390
100 = 2.5 %
400
Sr1
630
=
= 0.63
Sr2 1,000
Icomp. tr. 1
2.5
25.6 %
6 + 6 0.63
Rated power
inkVA
Transformer 1
400
630
Transformer 2
411
1,000
5.7
( 95% of 6)
u =
400 411
100 = 2.75 %
400
Sr1
630
=
= 0.63
Sr2 1,000
Icomp. tr. 1
2.75
28.7 %
6 + 5.7 0.63
Sr1
18.1 %
Sr2
Con
tents
Intro
duction
In case of equal transformer ratings, the partial loads are inversely proportional to the short-circuit voltages. The
transformer with the lower short-circuit voltage is loaded
more than the one with the higher short-circuit voltage.
In case of a transformer load varying over time for a group
of several transformers connected in parallel considering a
defined period of time, a minimum of total losses can be
attained by connecting individual transformers into or
disconnecting them from supply. Short-circuit losses are a
square function of the load. This means, the sum of shortcircuit losses plus no-load losses may in certain circumstances be lower when the load is split between several
transformers than if fewer transformers are used. To avoid
a cumbersome loss comparison of the transformers operated in parallel, the partial load where a connection of an
additional, identical transformer (the k-th transformer) is
economically efficient can be determined as follows using a
partial load factor n:
Partial load
Rated power
SGroup = n Sr
n=
Sgroup
Sr
n
The partial load factor n for efficient connection of a further identical transformer into supply (the k-th transformer)
can be determined according to the following formula:
n=
k
k (k 1) P0
Pk
Number of transformers to be connected in parallel
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
12
13
15
16
17
209
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
A-A
GEAFOLtransformer
Alternative
exhaust air
outlet
3,000
Solid wall
Low voltage
Guard rail
1U
1V
1W
800
Cable
basement
Intake air
7
8
9
Transformer 3
Transformer 3
Cable 1
630
10
Transformer 2
11
Transformer 2
Metering
Transfer
630
Transformer 3
12
Transformer 2
Transformer 1
13
Transformer 1
630
Transformer 1
14
15
6,000
Cable 2
16
17
210
TIP04_13_120_EN
7,500
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The transformers are suitable for operation up to an altitude of 1,000m above sea level. When installed in altitudes
higher than 1,000m, special versions are required. For
every 100metres that the permitted altitude of installation
is exceeded, the nominal power must be reduced by approximately 0.4% for liquid-filled transformers, and by
approximately 0.5% for cast-resin transformers.
Transformer room ventilation and pressure estimate in
case of an arc fault
Heat loss generated during any kind of transformer
operation must be dissipated from the transformer room
(Fig. 9/10). The possibility of natural ventilation should be
checked first. If this is not sufficient, a mechanical ventilation system must be installed.
The heat loss results from the power loss of the transformer. The power loss of a transformer is:
Pv=P0+1.1PK120(SAF/SAN)2 kW
P0:
No-load losses (kW)
1.1PK120: Short-circuit losses at 120C (according to the list or,
if already available, the test certificate specifications),
multiplied by a factor of 1.1 for the working
temperature of the insulation categories HV/LV = F/F
for GEAFOL transformers.
SAF: Power (kVA) for forced ventilation AF (air forced)
SAN: Apparent power (kVA) for natural ventilation AN
(natural air flow)
The total heat loss in the room (Qv) is the sum of the heat
losses of all transformers in the room:
3
4
Qv= Pv
7
8
9
10
11
12
QD
AD, KD
AW
A2
VL
Qv = Pv
V2
KW
QW
1U
1V
1W
Qv
Pv
v
A1, 2
H
Q W,D
AW,D
KW,D
VL
A1
V1
13
14
TIP04_13_121_EN
KD
15
16
17
211
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Qv=Pv=Qv1+Qv2+Qv3
To illustrate the size of the variables for the different ventilation methods, linear dependencies can be derived by
specifying realistic values. For a thermally effective height
of 5m, an air temperature rise of 15C between the inside
and outside area, a uniform heat transfer coefficient of
3.4 W/m2 for 20cm thick concrete and an air flow rate of
10,000m3/h for forced ventilation, which is led through an
air duct with an inlet/outlet cross section that is approximately four times as large.
5
6
7
Qv1=approx. 13 kW/m2A1,2 m2
Qv3=approx. 44 kW/m2A1,2 m2
10
11
12
3.00 m
Room width:
3.00 m
Room depth:
3.00 m
A1= 0.56 m
B1= 1.00 m
: 50 C
Demo
Edited by:
John Q Public
Entry fields
Date:
01.01.2016
Manufacturer:
SIEMENS
Transformer type:
GEAFOL
B2: 40 C
13
Project name:
Wall thickness = th
1,100 W
7,500 W
120%
12,980 W
Pv= 12,980 W
15
A2= 0.56 m
B2= 1.00 m
20 C
Fan
Fan
Fan
MVA
10
kV
12
kA
0.20
0.050
1:
2:
270
hPa
17.5
hPa
P v=
200
0.175 m
14
50 C
201
hPa
20 C
7.0
hPa
0.559 m
1.000 m
Create documentation
Operating instruction
16
TIP04_13_195_EN
17
Fig. 9/11: Ventilation of transformer room and approximated pressure rise under arc fault conditions
212
Chapter 10
Low-Voltage Switchgear
and Distribution Systems
10.1 Parameters and Forms
of Low-Voltage Switchgear
10.2 Planning Notes
10.3 Motor Control Centre
10.4 Distribution Boards
10.5 Busbar Trunking Systems
214
220
225
225
228
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Consumers
Rated currents
12
13
14
Switchgear /
distribution board
15
16
Consumers
17
1 In the associated standards, the term 'power switchgear and controlgear,
PSC assembly' is used
214
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Depending on the type of power distribution, a differentiation is made between point-to-point distribution boards
and line distribution boards. In point-to-point distribution
boards, the electric power is distributed radially from a
spatially limited system (see Fig. 10/1). Whereas in line
distribution boards today mostly busbar trunking systems the individual power tappings take place via spatially separated equipment and the power is transmitted
tothese tap-off units by means of encapsulated busbars
(see Fig. 10/2).
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Consumers
12
13
14
Busbar trunking system
15
16
Consumers
17
Fig. 10/2: Schematic diagram of a line distribution board
215
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
Form
Block diagram
No internal
separation
2a
Separation
between
busbars and
functional units
Explanations
No separations
between
terminals and
busbars
2b
Separations
between
terminals and
busbars
3a
No separation
between
terminals and
busbars
7
8
Separation
between
busbars and
functional units
+
Separation
between
functional units
3b
10
Separation
between
terminals and
busbars
11
Separation
between
terminals and
functional units
4a
12
13
Terminals in the
same compartment as the
connected functional unit
Terminals not in
the same compartment as the
connected functional unit
4b
14
Busbar
Legend:
15
16
17
Functional unit
Connection
for conductors lead
from the outside
Enclosure Internal separation
216
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
1
6
1 Circuit-breaker cubicle
2 Fixed-mounted or plug-in
switch-disconnector design
3NJ6 in-line
switchdisconnector
design
Fixed-mounted
design
3NJ4 in-line
switchdisconnector
design
Reactive power
compensation
Fixed-mounted
Plug-in
Withdrawable unit
Plug-in
Fixed-mounted
with front covers
Fixed-mounted
Fixed-mounted
Feed-in
Outgoing feeder
Coupling
Cable outlets
Motor feeder
(MCC)
Cable feeder
Cable feeder
Cable feeder
Central
compensation of
the reactive
power
Current In
6,300A max.
630A max.
630A max.
630A max.
630A max.
unchoked
up to 600 kvar
choked
up to 500 kvar
Connection
Front side
Front side
Front side
Front side
Cubicle width in mm
400/600/800/
1,000/1,400
600/1,000/1,200
1,000/1,200
1,000/1,200
600/800/1,000
800
Form 3b, 4b
Form 1, 2b
Form 1, 2b
Rear/top
Rear/top
Rear/top
Rear/top
Rear
Rear/top/without
Cubicle type
Circuit-breaker
design
Universal
mounting design
Mounting design
Fixed-mounted
Withdrawable
unit
Function
Internal separation
Busbars
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
217
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Installation
Busbar system
Single front
Busbar position
at the top
Cubicle design
Rated current
3,270 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
Front
N L3 L2 L1
PE
500
5
6
Single front
Busbar position
at the top
Rated current
3,270 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
or terminal compartment
on the back
Front or rear
N L3 L2 L1
PE
PE
800
Single front
Busbar position
at the top
Rated current
6,300 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
Front
N L3 L2 L1 N L3 L2 L1
PE
10
800
11
Single front
Busbar position
at the top
Rated current
6,300 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
or terminal compartment
at the back
Front or rear
12
N L3 L2 L1 N L3 L2 L1
PE
PE
1,200
13
Device/functional compartment
14
Busbar compartment
Tab. 10/3: Cubicle types and arrangement of the busbars on the cubicles
15
16
17
218
Cross-wiring compartment
Operating cubicles
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Busbar system
Single front
Busbar position
Cubicle design
Rated current
4,000 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
Front
2
PE
N
L3
L2
L1
N
L3
L2
L1
PE
600
Single front
Busbar position
rear-top or -bottom
Rated current
7,010 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
5
PE
N
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
L1
Front
N
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
L1
PE
800
Double front
Stand-alone in the room
Busbar position
top- or bottom-centre,
top, and bottom
Rated current
4,000 A max.
8
PE
PE
N
L3
Cable/busbar entry
Front
L2
L1
10
L3
L2
L1
PE
PE
1,000
Double front
Busbar position
top- or bottom-centre
Rated current
7,010 A max.
Cable/busbar entry
11
PE
PE
N
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
L1
12
Front
N
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
L1
PE
13
PE
1,200
14
Device/functional compartment
Busbar compartment
Tab. 10/3: Cubicle types and arrangement of the busbars on the cubicles
Cross-wiring compartment
Operating cubicles
15
16
17
219
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
100 mm
14
100 mm 4)
2,000 mm 1)
Generator-supplied power systems must not be compensated if problems may arise in generator control as a
result of compensation control (disconnecting the compensation system during switch-over to generator mode
or static, generator-tuned compensation is possible)
Choking of a compensation system depends on the
power system requirements as well those of the client
and the DSO.
Generator-fed networks must not be compensated if a
regulated compensation could lead to problems in the
generator control (deactivate compensation upon switching to generator mode or use fixed compensation
matched to the generator is possible)
Choking of a compensation system depends on the
requirements of the network, the customer, and also
theDSO.
Switchgear
1)
2)
3)
4)
16
17
220
TIP04_16_001_EN
15
600 mm
700 mm
1) Minimum
700 mm
600 mm
700 mm
700 mm
TIP04_16_002_EN
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Altitude
Minimum
maintenance 600 mm
gangway width
1)
Escape direction
2)
5
1) Circuit-breaker
6
Minimum
maintenance 500 mm
gangway width
Escape direction
8
9
2)
10
11
1) Circuit-breaker
fully withdrawn
2) Door in arrest position
12
13
Minimum
maintenance 500 mm
gangway width
Escape direction
Unfolded
swivel frame
behind the door
TIP04_16_003_EN
1)
14
15
16
17
221
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Singlefront installations
10
Front
connection
With main busbar
position at the top
11
Rear
connection
12
With main busbar
position at the rear
13
Doublefront installations
14
(1)
With main busbar
position at the rear
(2)
16
(3)
(4)
TIP04_16_004_EN
15
Doublefront units
Rear panel
17
Fig. 10/7: Cubicle arrangement for double-front installations
222
Door
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Level 1
Personal safety
without extensive
limitation of the
arc fault effects
within the
installation.
2
3
4
Level 2
Personal safety
with extensive
limitation of the
arc fault effects
to one cubicle or
double-front unit.
5
6
7
Level 3
Personal safety with
limitation to the
main busbar
compartment on a
cubicle or doublefront unit and the
device or cable
connection
compartment.
Level 4
Personal safety
with limitation
of the arc fault
effects to the
place of origin.
8
9
10
11
TIP04_16_003_EN
12
Fig. 10/8: Arc fault levels (installation segments to which the arcing
fault is limited are shown orange)
13
14
15
16
17
223
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Fig. 10/9: Passive system to prevent arcing faults with insulated busbar, panel connector, incoming and outgoing feeder
224
Con
tents
Intro
duction
If motor drives are available, low-voltage switchgear installations are used as motor control centres (MCC). The MCC
panels are available in fixed-mounted or withdrawable-unit
design and equipped with a door-locking main switch and
motor starter combination. Each main switch has motor
switching capacity (6 to 8times the rated current Ir of the
motor) and disconnecting capacity so that opening the
panel door in front of the withdrawable unit is only possible after switch-off.
In compliance with IEC61439-3 (VDE0660-600-3), distribution boards are defined as switchgear assemblies in
electric power distribution intended to be operated by
ordinary persons (DBO). They are to meet the following
criteria:
Operation by ordinary persons is possible, for example, in
home use
The outgoing circuits contain short-circuit protection
equipment
The rated voltage Un to earth is 300VAC max.
The rated current In of the outgoing feeders is 125A max.
and In of the switchgear assemblies is 250A max.
A closed, stationary enclosure is intended for use in
electric power distribution
Indoor and outdoor installation is possible
They must comply with overvoltage category III minimum
(see IEC60439-1;VDE0660-600-1)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
2 and 3
0.8
4 and 5
0.7
6 to 9 includingly
0.6
10 and more
0.5
Tab. 10/4: Rated diversity factors (RDF) for DBO in acc. with
IEC61439-3 (VDE0660-600-3)
15
16
17
225
Con
tents
Intro
duction
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
226
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Connection compartments
After the installation of the switchgear and distribution
boards, the space available in the internal or external
connection compartment for outgoing cables and wires is
decisive for the efficient workflow of connection work. At
first, a particularly small encapsulation appears to be very
economical because of the low purchase price. However,
due to the confined space, the installation expenses can be
so high when connecting cables and wires the first time
and later that this cost advantage is lost. For cables with a
large cross section, make sure that there is enough space to
spread the wires and for routing the cable.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Surfacemounted
Partly
recessed
Flush-mounted
with cover frame
TIP04_13_135_EN
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Low-Voltage Switchgear and Distribution Systems
227
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Profibus
AS-Interface
Industrial Ethernet
BACnet
DALI
KNX
...
10
System LI
11
System LD
System BD2
12
13
System BD2
14
System LI
System LR
15
16
System BD01
17
Fig. 10/11: SIVACON 8PS busbar trunking systems for different requirements and loads
228
System BD01
TIP04_13_136
System BD2
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1)
Power transmission
Busbar trunking units without tap-off points are used for
power transmission. They are available in standard lengths
and custom lengths. Besides the standard lengths, the
customer can also choose a specific length from various
length ranges to suit individual constructive requirements.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
229
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
It may be necessary to provide additional protection housing for the trunk line in the room for reasons of functional
endurance. Depending on the required functional endurance class and the planned carrier/support system, different design variants are offered with Promatect boards
(encapsulation on 2, 3 or 4 sides, refer to Fig. 10/12).
Because of the poorer ventilation and heat dissipation
through the protection housing, the reduction factors
specified by the manufacturers must be taken into account
in later planning steps in order to determine the maximum
permissible currents. A reduction factor of 0.5 can be
assumed for an initial estimation.
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
7
Functional endurance with 3-sided compartmentalisation
10
11
12
2
4
1
3
7
14
3
2
15
2
3
4
5
16
6
7
Busbar system
Compartmentalisation
Strengthened compartmentalisation at the edges
Load distribution plate
Threaded rod (M12/M16)
Bracket in compliance with the statics
Carrier profile in compliance with the statics
1) 4-sided
compartmentalisation
only possible in horizontal installation
17
TIP04_13_137_EN
13
230
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Characteristics to be verified
Verification by ...
Testing
Calculation
Construction rules
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Heat resistance
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Resistance to UV radiation
Yes
No
Yes
Impact test
Yes
No
No
Labels
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Clearances in air
Yes
No
Yes
Creepage distances
No
No
Yes
Continuity of the connection between bodies of the BTS and the protection
circuit
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Installation of equipment
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Heating limits
Yes
Yes
No
Short-circuit strength
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Mechanical function
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Insulation properties:
Tab. 10/5: Design verification for BTS in acc. with IEC61439-6 (VDE0660-6)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
231
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Characteristic
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cable installation
Network
configuration
Operational
safety
Flexibility
Fire load
Electromagnetic
interference
Current carrying
capacity
Freedom from
halogen/PVC
Space
requirements
Weight
Installation
9
Distributed power distribution
with busbar
10
11
12
13
14
TIP04_13_138_EN
15
16
17
232
Chapter 11
Low-voltage Protection and
Switching Devices
11.1 Circuits and Device Assignment
11.2 Requirements on the Protection
Devices in the Three Circuit Types
11.3 Residual Current and Arc Fault
Detection Devices
236
237
240
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
234
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Siemens switching and protection devices (portfolio excerpt)
Circuit-breakers
10
11
Fuse systems
NEOZED fuse system
12
13
14
15
TIP04_13_123_EN
16
17
235
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Circuit
Task
Protection device
Supply
circuit
System
protection
Distribution System
circuit
protection
Final circuit
Tab. 11/1: Circuit matrix for protection and switching devices in the
low-voltage power distribution system
8
9
ACB
Supply circuit
10
11
ACB
LT-Si
Si-LT
MCCB
12
Distribution circuit
13
MCCB
Si-LT
MSP
14
15
16
M
17
Fig. 11/2: Protection device matrix according to circuit type
236
TIP04_13_124_EN
Final circuit
Con
tents
Intro
duction
11.2 R
equirements on the Protection
Devices in the Three Circuit
Types
11.2.1 Use in the Supply Circuit
The system feed-in or supply circuit is the most sensitive
circuit in the entire power distribution. Afailure here would
result in the entire network and therefore the building or
production being without power. This worst-case scenario
must be considered during the planning. Redundant system supplies and selective protection setting are important
preconditions for a safe network configuration. Some
important cornerstones for dimensioning and proper
device selection are discussed in the following sections.
Rated current
The supply circuit-breaker in the low-voltage main distribution system (LVMD) must be dimensioned for the maximum
load of the transformer/generator. When using ventilated
transformers, the higher operating current of up to 1.5 Ir
of the transformer must be taken into account.
2
3
Trip units
5
6
7
Internal accessories
Depending on the respective control, not only shunt trips
but also undervoltage releases are required.
Short-circuit strength
Communication
Utilisation category
When dimensioning a selective network, time grading of
the protection devices is often essential. When using time
grading up to 500ms, the selected circuit-breaker must be
able to carry the short-circuit current that occurs for the set
time. Close to the transformer, the currents are very high.
This current carrying capacity is specified by the Icw value
(rated short-time withstand current) of the circuit-breaker;
this means the contact system must be able to carry the
maximum short-circuit current, meaning the energy con-
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
237
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Utilisation category
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
238
Con
tents
Intro
duction
ACB
Air circuit-
breaker
MCCB
Moulded-case
circuit-breaker
Fuse-switchdisconnector
Switchdisconnectors
with fuses
MCB
Miniature
circuit-breaker
Reference
value,
specifications
Standards
IEC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Region
Application
System
protection
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Power supply
system
Mounting
Fixed
mounting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Availability
Plug-in
Max. 800A
Partly
Withdrawable
unit
Yes
Yes
Nominal current
In
Max.
6,300A
Max. 1,600A
Max. 630A
Max. 630A
Max. 125A
Operating
current IB
Short-circuit
breaking capacity
Icu
Max.
150kA
Max. 150kA
Max. 120kA
Max. 120kA
Max. 25kA
No. of phases
3-phase
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
4-phase
Yes
Yes
Partly
Power supply
system
Tripping
characteristics
ETU 1)
Yes
Yes
TMTU 2)
Partly
Yes
Yes
Yes
Tripping function
LI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LSI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (2-/4-phase)
Yes
Yes
Fixed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Adjustable
Yes
Yes
Optional
Yes
Yes
High
Yes
Medium
Yes
Yes
Low
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Remote
(motor)
Yes
Yes
Partly
Full rated
current up to
60C
50C
30C
30C
30C
Switchgear
System
synchronisation
Yes
Max. 800A
Power supply
system
Selectivity
Yes
Conditional
(dependent on
network
topology and the
short-circuit
currents present)
Yes
(limited use
owing to limited
rated current and
convenience)
Yes
(limited use
owing to limited
rated current
and
convenience)
Conditional
(dependent on
network topology
and the shortcircuit currents
present; in addition
the rated current is
limited)
Customer
specification,
power supply
system
Characteristics
Communication
(data
transmission)
Activation
Derating
1)
2)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power supply
system
Power supply
system
9
Power supply
system
Customer
specification
Customer
specification
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
239
Con
tents
Intro
duction
11.3 R
esidual Current and Arc-fault
Detection Devices
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 mA
10,000
TIP04_13_125_EN
t in ms
2,000
1,000
500
AC-1
AC-2
AC-3
200
100
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
AC-4.1
50
20
0.1 0.2 0.5 1
AC-4.3
AC-4.2
5 10 20
10,000
2,000 5,000
IM in mA
Duration of exposure
Range AC-1:
Perception is possible,
but generally no shock reaction.
Range AC-2:
Perception and involuntary muscle contractions probable,
but generally no harmful physiological effects.
Range AC-3:
Strong involuntary muscle contractions.
Breathing difficulties. Reversible impairment of the heart function.
Immobilisation (muscle spasm) may occur.
Effects increasing with amperage and duration of current flow.
Generally, organic damage needn't be expected.
Range AC-4.1 to AC-4-3:
Pathophysiological effects may occur, such as cardiac arrest, apnoea,
burns or other cellular damage. Probability of ventricular fibrillation increasing
with amperage and duration of current flow.
AC-4.1 Probability of ventricular fibrillation increasing up to approx. 5 %
AC-4.2 Probability of ventricular fibrillation increasing up to approx. 50 %
AC-4.3 Probability of ventricular fibrillation over 50 %
Con
tents
Intro
duction
TN system
TT system
IaU0/Zs
IaU0/Zs
Protection device
Ia
ta1)
MCB type B
5 In
<0.1 s
MCB type C
10 In
<0.1 s
Fuse gG
approx.
14 In
<0.4 s
2
3
IaU0/Zs
In50 V/RA
Ia
ta1)
RCD general
>5 In
0.04 s
RCD general
>2 In
0.15 s
RCD selective
>5 In
0.15 s
RCD selective
>2 In
0.2 s
6
7
1)
The values for ta refer to the specifications in the relevant product standards.
In Rated residual current of residual current device in A
RA Sum of resistances of the earth electrode and the protection conductor of the exposed conductive parts
U0 Nominal AC voltage of phase to earth
Zs Fault loop impedance
Tab. 11/3: Protection device selection in the TN and TT system with rated voltages of 230/400 V AC
Current
form
AC
B+
10
Type
Tripping
current
Alternating current
0.5 1.0 In
0.35 1.4 In
12
Phase angle 90 :
0.25 1.4 In
Half-wave current
overlaid with smooth
direct current
11
13
14
max. 1.4 In
+ 6 mA
+ 10 mA
+ 0.4 In
+ 0.4 In
+ DC
0.5 1.4 In
0.5 2.0 In
15
TIP04_13_126_EN
Current type
Type
16
17
Tab. 11/4: Types of residual current devices and their tripping ranges
241
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
Circuit
Load current
iL
AC
iL
iF1
iF1
iF1
iF1
iL
iF1
iL
iL
iF1
iF1
iF1
iL
iF2
iF2
iF1
iF2
iF2
iF1
M
t
17
Tab. 11/5: Residual current device types and possible forms of fault currents
242
iF1
iL
iF1
iL
13
iF2
iF1
iL
12
iL
16
iF1
iL
iF1
iL
15
iF1
iL
iF1
11
iL
iF1
iL
13
iF2
t
iF1
14
iF1
iL
iL
12
iF1
11
iF1
iL
10
iL
iF1
iL
iL
iL
t
iF1
iF1
iL
iL
iF1
t
iL
iL
B+
Fault current
TIP04_13_127_EN
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fig. 11/4: Residual current operated
circuit-breaker type F
RCD
MRCD
Modular residual
current device
(without integral
current breaking
device)
10
CBR
RCCB
Circuit-breakers
incorporating residual
current protection
Residual current
operated circuit
breaker without
integrated overcurrent
protector1)
RCBO
Residual current
operated circuit
breaker with overcurrent protector1)
PRCD
SRCD
Portable residual
current protection
device, e.g. integrated
in plugs and power
strips
Socket-outlet
residual current
protection device
(stationary,
i.e. wall socket)
11
12
IEC 60947-2
Appendix B
(VDE 0660-101
Appendix B)
IEC 61008-1
(VDE 0664-10)
IEC 61009-1
(VDE 0664-20)
13
HD 639 S1/A2
(VDE 0661-10/A2)
14
TIP04_13_151_EN
15
16
17
243
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
244
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Covering the protection gap in the IEC market by using
well proven technology from the UL scope of standards
Fault condition
Serial
New
AFDD
Load
N
Parallel
L
Phase-Neutral/
Phase-Phase
N
Parallel
PhaseProtection
Conductor
New
Load
MCB
AFDD
New
Load
RCD
AFDD
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Fig. 11/7: 5SM6 arc-fault detection unit
245
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
246
Chapter 12
Starting, Switching, and
ProtectingMotors
12.1 Protecting Electric Motors
12.2 Switching Electric Motors
12.3 Comparison of Connections
for Motor Start-up
12.4 Safety of Machines
248
249
256
258
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
248
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
S1 continuous duty
5
6
Pv
t
S2 short-time duty
Pv
t
TC
Pv
10
11
12
13
14
P
TC
Pv
t
15
16
17
249
Con
tents
Intro
duction
TC
Pv
t
Idle time tL
No pause
Thermal steady state is not reached
TC
Pv
t
t
S7 like S6 with electrical braking
t
Pv
TC
10
TC
Pv
11
12
t
Pref
13
14
t
Pv
t
t
Pref
15
16
TC
Pv
t
t
17
250
Con
tents
Intro
duction
malfunctions may occur during switching in certain circumstances. In this case, contactors may not make or break.
3
4
5
6
Switching off:
When switching off AC-actuated contactors, the contactor
may no longer switch off when the control circuit is interrupted because of a control cable capacitance that is too
large. The following countermeasures can be implemented
here:
Change the switching topology so that shorter control
cables can be used
Use DC-actuated contactors
Reduce the control voltage
Use a contactor with greater holding power for the
solenoid
Connect an ohmic resistance in parallel to increase the
holding power (additional load unit)
Star-delta start
Switching on:
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
251
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Current peaks can be minimised through a preferred connection during the switchover.
Semiconductor connection
7
8
9
Soft starter
10
11
12
The motor feeder between the soft starter and the motor
must not contain any capacitive elements (e.g. no reactive
power compensation unit). In order to avoid faults in the
compensation unit and/or soft starter, neither static systems for reactive power compensation not a dynamic
power factor correction (PFC) may be operated during the
starting and stopping of the soft starter.
13
14
When selecting a soft starter, it is important that the application and the start-up time of the motor are considered
closely. Long start-up times mean a thermal load on the
soft starter. The software STS (Simulation Tool for Soft
Starters) can be used to simulate and select Siemens soft
starters taking into account various parameters such as the
power system conditions, motor data, load data, and
special application requirements.
15
16
17
252
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Conveyor belt
Roller conveyor
Compressor
Small ventilator
Pump
Hydraulic pump
60
10
Deactivated
50
10
4 IM
30
10
4 IM
30
10
Deactivated
30
10
Deactivated
Torque ramp
Starting torque% 60
Final torque% 150
Start-up time
s 10
50
150
10
40
150
10
20
150
10
10
150
10
10
150
10
Start-up parameters
Break-away pulse
Deactivated
(0 ms)
Deactivated
(0 ms)
Deactivated
(0 ms)
Deactivated
(0 ms)
Deactivated
(0 ms)
Deactivated
(0 ms)
Stopping method
Soft stopping
Soft stopping
Free stopping
Free stopping
Free stopping
Free stopping
3
4
5
6
Agitator
Centrifuge
Milling machine
Start-up parameters
30
30
4 IM
30
10
4 IM
Torque ramp
Starting torque% 30
Final torque% 150
Start-up time
s 30
30
150
30
30
150
30
Break-away pulse
Deactivated (0 ms)
Deactivated (0 ms)
Deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping method
Free stopping
Free stopping
10
12
Large ventilator
Mill
Crusher
50
60
4 IM
50
60
4 IM
30
60
4 IM
Torque ramp
Starting torque% 20
Final torque% 150
Start-up time
s 60
50
150
60
50
150
60
20
150
60
Break-away pulse
Deactivated (0 ms)
80%, 300 ms
80%, 300 ms
Deactivated (0 ms)
Stopping method
Free stopping
Free stopping
Free stopping
Free stopping
Start-up parameters
Tab. 12/2: Examples of starting methods and settings for different applications
11
13
14
15
16
17
253
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Semiconductor fuses should be used as upstream protection devices to fulfill requirements of coordination type 2
according IEC 60947-4-2 (VDE 0660-117). With an
increased switching frequency, the technical data of the
manufacturer must be considered in any case. The average switching frequency is approximately 20 switching
cycles per hour. During planning, the special regulations of
the device manufacturer must be observed. These refer to
the installation instructions and the selection of the switching and protection devices.
8
9
10
Frequency converter
Frequency converters are used to adapt the speed in order
to protect the mechanical system or reduce current peaks,
as with the soft starter. Frequency converters are better
than soft starters for dynamic processes. The speed of the
connected motor can be changed continuously, and without almost any losses, by varying the voltage and the
frequency. A motor can also be operated above the rated
speed with a frequency converter, without the torque
dropping off. A further advantage of frequency converters
is the power feedback to the supply system.
11
12
13
14
15
Particularities of frequency converters are system perturbations and the effect on the EMC. As described in chapter 5,
converters produce harmonic currents and voltages. As the
other equipment in the supply system is designed for
sinusoidal voltages, a distortion of the voltage can have
negative effects or even destroy the equipment and electrical utilities.
16
17
254
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Starting method
Meaning
Direct
If the "Direct" starting method is set, the voltage at the motor is increased to nearly the line voltage when the start
command is issued. This corresponds approximately to the starting behaviour with a contactor.
Voltage ramp
The terminal voltage of the motor is increased within a settable start-up time from a parametrisable starting voltage
to the line voltage.
Torque control
With the torque control, the torque generated in the motor is increased linearly from a parametrisable starting
torque to parametrisable final torque within a settable torque starting time.
In combination with the "Voltage ramp" starting method, the starter constantly measures the phase current during
the current limiting via an integrated current transformer. A current limiting value (IB) can be set on the soft starter
during the motor start-up. When this value is reached, the soft starter regulates the motor voltage so that the
current does not exceed the set value. The current limiting is superimposed on the "Voltage ramp" starting method.
In combination with the "Torque control" starting method, the starter constantly measures the phase current during
the current limiting via an integrated current transformer. A current limiting value can be set on the soft starter
during the motor start-up. When this value is reached, the soft starter regulates the motor voltage so that the
current does not exceed the set value. The current limiting is superimposed on the "Torque control" starting method.
2
3
4
5
If IP54 motors are used outdoors, condensation can form when the motor cools down (for example, over night or in
Motor heating (supporting
winter). This can cause leakage currents or short circuits when the motor is switched on. A "pulsing" direct current is
function)
fed in to heat up the motor winding, which does not turn the motor.
Tab. 12/3: Starting methods for soft starters and their meaning
Stopping method
Meaning
Free stopping
In "Free stopping", the energy supply to the motor is interrupted when the ON command is cancelled on the soft
starter. The motor runs down freely, only driven by the moment of inertia (rotating mass) of the rotor and the load.
Torque ramp
The free stopping is extended by the torque ramp. This function is used to prevent the load stopping suddenly. This
is typical of applications with a small moment of inertia or high counter torque (for example, conveyor belts).
Pump stop
Pump stop is used to prevent water hammer when the pump is switched off. This reduces noise and the stressing of
the pipes and any flaps contained therein.
DC braking
Free stopping is shortened by DC braking. DC braking should be used for applications with large moments of inertia.
The moments of inertia of the load shouldnt be more than 5 times the moments of inertia of the motor:
JLoad5 JMotor
Dynamic DC braking /
Compound braking
Free stopping is shortened by DC braking. Compound braking could be used for applications with small moments of
inertia. The moments of inertia of the load shouldnt be more than the moments of inertia of the motor:
JLoadJMotor
Tab. 12/4: Stopping methods for soft starters and their meaning
8
9
10
11
12
13
Line filters are used to reduce the radiation. These also limit
the system perturbations. An electromagnetic-compatible
installation is required so that the line filters can achieve
their maximum effect. A shielded cable is required between
the converter and the motor so that the parasitic currents
can flow back to the converter along a low-inductance
path. The motor cables should have a symmetric conductor
structure.
The most important factors with regard to high-frequency
leakage currents are:
Size of the DC-link voltage
DC-link voltage UZK of the converter
Rate of voltage rise du/dt when switching
14
15
16
17
255
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12.3 C
omparison of Connections for
Motor Start-up
The previously described starting connections result in
different behaviours during motor start-up, which are
illustrated graphically in Fig. 12/1 through a comparison of
the voltage, current, and torque curves.
With a direct starter, the motors are stressed thermally and
mechanically by the high current that is applied immediately. Voltage changes are also induced in the supply
network. In order to limit these disturbances in the supply
network, apparent power limit values are specified for the
direct start in the technical supply conditions [14] of the
German distribution system operators. The following are
permitted for motors that start occasionally (twice a day):
Alternating current motors with an apparent power of not
more than 1.7 kVA or
Three-phase motors with an apparent power of not more
than 5.2 kVA or
For higher apparent powers, motors with a starting
current (r.m.s. value of current half periods) of not more
than 60 A
With the star-delta starter in the star connection the voltage over the motor-winding is limited to 1/3 = 0.58 times
the phase-to-phase voltage, which also reduces the starting
current.
The soft starter increases the motor voltage within a specified start-up time. The starting voltage should be selected
according to the break-away torque for the motor start-up.
For example, the break-away pulse can be set for the SIRIUS
Fig. 12/2
3RW44 soft starter. With the root 3 connection (Fig.
12/2)
for soft starters, the rated current can be limited to 1/3 =
0.58times the value of the rated motor current.
With the frequency converter, the drive can be ramped in
acontrolled manner with the rated current, because the
start-up characteristic can be set. During operation, the
control enables smooth changes in speed via variations in
the frequency, whereby the drive can be operated with
the rated torque even at low speeds. The speed control
can be used to improve the efficiency during operation.
The SIZER for Siemens configuration software supports
the selection and dimensioning of the motor and frequency converter (further information on the Internet at
siemens.com/sizer).
13
14
15
16
17
256
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Direct
Stardelta
U
100 %
Soft starter
U
100 %
Terminal
voltage
Frequency converter
U
100 %
70 %
58 %
U
100 %
UBoost
30 %
Time
Time
Time
Time
4
I
Starting
current
Motor speed
Torque
Motor speed
Motor speed
Motor speed
Motor speed
Motor speed
Motor speed
Fig. 12/1: Characteristic behaviour of the various connections during motor start-up
TIP04_13_139_EN
Motor speed
8
9
10
11
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
L1
L2
L3
N
PE
12
13
U2
U1
L2
T1
14
T2
V1
L1
V2
Standard connection:
Rated current Ie corresponds
to the rated motor current In
3 cables to the motor
W1
T3
15
L3
Root-3 connection:
Rated current Ie corresponds to approximately
58 % of the rated motor current In
6 cables to the motor (as for star-delta starters)
Fig. 12/2: Comparison of connections for soft starters between standard connection and root-3 connection
TIP04_13_140_EN
W2
16
17
257
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Greater economy
9
10
Greater standardisation
Easier to operate through uniform user interfaces
Can be increasingly reused thanks to the use of libraries
Fewer control cabinet versions on the machines
Simplified installation through bus systems
11
12
Greater productivity
13
14
15
Greater flexibility
16
17
258
Better chances in the worldwide market through compliance with the required approvals and conformance with
the EU directives
Simplified maintenance and plant expansion thanks to
long-term product and system availability
In Europe, machine manufacturers (product safety) and
machine operators are legally obligated to guarantee the
safety of personnel and the environment. Lots of other
countries, in which there are no such legal requirements,
are also becoming increasingly aware of this subject. In
Europe, provided machines must be safe irrespective of
whether they are new or used. For this reason, provision
has the following meaning: the machine is manufactured
or has a major refit in Europe or it is imported into Europe
and operated there.
European directives such as the Low-voltage Directive,
Machinery Directive, EMC Directive, etc. (see Fig. 12/3
12/3)
describe the basic requirements for machine
manufacturers or plant operators, who modernise and
modify their own machines to a large extent.
Compliance with the Machinery Directive can be guaranteed in different ways:
In the form of a machine acceptance through a certification office
By satisfying the harmonised standards
Through a separate safety certificate with increased test
and documentation work
The CE marking with the appropriate safety certificate is
always the visible proof of compliance with the Machinery
Directive. According to the EU Occupational Safety and
Health Framework Directive, this is mandatory.
To ensure conformance with a directive, it is recommended that you use the appropriate harmonised European standards. The presumption of conformity is then
assumed (see Fig. 12/3) and provides manufacturers and
operators with legal certainty with regard to the fulfilment of national regulations and also EC (or EU) directives. With the CE marking, the manufacturer of a machine documents the compliance with all relevant directives and regulations in the free movement of goods.
Since the European directives are accepted worldwide,
their use is helpful, for example, when exporting to countries of the European Economic Area (EEA). The most
important standards for functional safety are also listed in
Fig. 12/3. Further information is available on the Internet
at siemens.com/safety-infomaterial
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Basic safety requirements
in the manufacturing industry
Basics standards
for safetyrelated control functions
10
Low-voltage
Directive
Machinery
Directive
(2014/35/EU)
(2006/42/EU)
Individual
Directive "Use of
Work Equipment"
(2009/104/EC)
Harmonised European
standards
Manufacturer
User
12
ISO 138491
Safety of machines
Safety-related components
of control units,
Part 1: General design guidelines
Successor to EN 954-1
General architectures,
safety integrity level (SIL)
SIL 1, SIL 2, SIL 3
Fig. 12/3: Directives and standards for the functional safety of machines
13
14
TIP04_13_122_EN
e.g. machines
Harmonised standards
(presumption of
conformity)
11
15
16
17
259
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
260
Chapter 13
Supply using Converters
andGenerators
13.1
13.2
UPS Systems
Embedded Generation Systems
263
266
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
In the guidelines for the connection of embedded or distributed generation systems, emergency generators are
considered as such and adistinction is made according to
the connection to the power supply system. The following
are defined as power sources for safety purposes according
to IEC60364-5-56 (VDE0100-560):
Rechargeable batteries
Primary cells
Generators whose drive machine functions independently
of the normal power supply
A separate system feed-in (for Germany, supplemented
by a"dual system") from the supply network that is really
independent of the normal supply
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
262
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Dynamic UPS
systems with
directly coupled
kinetic storage cell
Dynamic UPS
systems with
storage battery or
equivalent kinetic
storage cell
Dynamic UPS
systems as
no-break standby
generating set
(without
interruption time)
TIP02_12_019_EN
3
4
Dynamic UPS
systems as
quick-starting
standby generating
set (with short-time
interruption)
6
7
Manual bypass
Electronic bypass
Reactor
Supply
network
Loads
Outer rotor
Inner rotor
approx.
1,500
rev/min
approx.
2,600
rev/min
Diesel
engine
Electromagnetic
coupling
Flywheel
Synchronisation
machine
TIP02_12_020_EN
Rotor
10
11
12
The operating modes of dynamic UPS systems in accordance with DIN6280-12 permit further distinctions to be
made:
Stand-by active mode (quick-starting short break: 2 to
500 ms interruption time)
Continuous operation mode (electrically isolated load
supply through UPS: nobreak readiness)
Active following mode (uninterruptible transfers between
load supply from the normal network and load supply
from the synchronised UPS: nobreak readiness)
13
14
15
16
17
263
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
To influence the supply voltage, power electronic components such as diodes, thyristors, and transistors are used in
static UPS systems. Dependent on the influence exercised,
IEC62040-3 (VDE0558-530) classifies static UPS systems
according to the quality of the UPS output voltage and the
behaviour in case of line faults (see Tab. 13/1).
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Line faults
Time
1. Power failures
> 10ms
For
example
IEC62040-3
UPS solution
VFD
Voltage
+Frequency
Dependent
Classification 3
Passive standby
mode (off-line)
2. Voltage fluctuations
> 16ms
3. Voltage peaks
4 16ms
4. Undervoltages
continuous
5. Overvoltages
continuous
6. Surge
> 4ms
7. Lightning strikes
sporadic
VI
Voltage
Independent
VFI
Voltage
+Frequency
Independant
Classification 2
Line-interactive
mode
Classification 1
Double-conversion
mode (on-line)
periodic
9. Voltage harmonics
continuous
sporadic
Tab. 13/1: Types of line faults and matching UPS solutions based on IEC62040-3 (VDE0558-530) [12]
264
Supplier solution
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
a)
Supply
network
Load
Normal mode
without influencing
1 Switch
2 Rectifier/
charger
3 Battery
4 Inverter
10
5 4-quadrant
inverter
b)
6 Static bypass
Normal mode
using 4-quadrant inv. (5)
Supply
network
switch
11
7 Manual bypass
switch
Load
12
13
Normal mode
using rect. (2) and inv. (4)
Supply
network
Load
TIP02_12_021_EN
c)
14
15
Fig. 13/3: UPS systems with energy flow during normal operation:
a) Off-line UPS system (VFD)
b) Line-interactive UPS system (VI)
c) On-line UPS system (VFI)
16
17
265
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
266
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
AA
12
Exhaust system
24-hour tank
with oil sump
13
14
Exhaust air
Muffler
TIP04_13_141_EN
Supply air
Muffler
Switchgear
15
16
17
267
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Especially when there is alarge proportion of critical consumers in relation to the generator unit output, an individual test must be performed. The possibility of staggering
the connection of loads or load groups significantly reduces
the required generator unit output. If turbocharger motors
are used, the load must be connected in steps.
2
3
4
5
Dynamic response
7
8
9
10
11
160
TIP01_11_015_EN
140
Spatial volume in in m3
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
400
800
1,200
1,600
2,000
Short-circuit behaviour
13
14
15
16
17
268
450
page 269
TIP01_11_016_EN
12
400
Fuel consumption in l/h
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
0
400
800
1,200
1,600
2,000
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
Tank facilities
Diesel fuel or fuel oil can be used for diesel generator units.
Each generator unit tank facility should have enough fuel
Fig. 13/6).
13/6 Facilities
for 8 hours of operation at full load (Fig.
that are subject to IEC60364-7-710 (VDE0100-710) must
be dimensioned for at least 24 hours of operation at full
load. In tank facilities for emergency power supply, the fuel
level must be at least 0.5m above the injection pump of
the diesel engine. In many cases, in particular for systems
in continuous operation, it may be better to divide the tank
facilities into a24-hour tank and astorage tank. The 24hour tank then remains in the generator unit room with
capacity to suit the available space. The storage tank can
then be installed in another room, or designed as an overground tank for outdoor installation or as an underground
tank. The 24-hour tank is refuelled by means of an automatic filling device.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
269
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Metering
13
=
=
Generator
14
15
16
Grid
TIP04_13_142_EN
17
Fig. 13/7: Circuit diagram for connecting the wind turbine into the
supply grid
270
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Increasing performance and cost higher risk
2
3
Rotor diameter
4
5
Rotor hub height
TIP04_13_143_EN
2012
1990
Rating
250 kW
1,500 kW
3,000 kW
6,000 kW
Rotor diameter
30 m
70 m
90 m
126 m
50 m
100 m
105 m
135 m
Annual output
400,000 kWh
3,500,000 kWh
6,900,000 kWh
Wind turbine
Automation / SCADA / HMI
Busbar trunking systems
Circuit protection systems
Electric drives
Generator / inverter
Video surveillance
Medium-voltage
transformer
Medium-voltage switchgear
Circuit-breaker
Switchboards
Busbar trunking systems
Control centre
Automation
Monitoring
Control
Supply meter
Wind farm
10
11
12
13
5
7
14
15
6
1
Fig. 13/9: Embedding wind turbines into the electric power distribution grid
TIP04_13_144_EN
Fig. 13/8: Technical development of wind turbines from 1990 until 2012
16
17
271
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Service time
Days/Months
12
Diabatic
Adiabatic
Water-pumped
storage facility
Hours
13
CAES 1)
Technology
Li-ion
NaS
Minutes
14
16
17
Electrical double
layer capacitor
Commercial use
Superconductor
Commercial launch
Demonstration
1 kW
1)
SIESTORAGE
Flywheel energy
storage system
Seconds
15
batteries
10 kW
100 kW
1 MW
10 MW
100 MW
1,000 MW
272
Power
TIP04_13_145_EN
11
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Load variations
It is imperative that power generation follows such load
variations. If this is not the case, deviations from normal
voltage are the consequence. The permissible voltage
deviation as part of the power quality is specified in the
EN50160 standard. Observance of this standard is up to the
grid operators. They must ensure that 95% of the 10-minute
means of the r.m.s. supply voltage value for every weekly
interval are within the range of Un 10% under normal
operating conditions without failures or supply interruptions. As aresult of the liberalisation of the energy market,
the roles of grid operators, electricity suppliers, and power
generators are now separated by jurisdiction as well as by
business administration, which aggravates this task. Owing
to the legal framework, more and more distributed power
generators are integrated into the grids. To let renewables
play amore prominent part, the obligation to purchase such
energy quantities was introduced for grid operators on the
one hand, and power generation for one's own use was
subsidized on the other. But at the same time, the grid
operators bear the risk for the consequences of load variations on the electricity grid. Therefore, grid operators draw
up forecasts, for example for large-scale consumers and in
asummarized form even for entire cities. Besides such
already common forecasts, the forecastability of feed-in
from renewables is playing an increasingly important role.
But with every forecast, grid operators run the risk of misinterpretation of actual consumption.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Grid
11
Transformer
12
System control
13
Filters
Series
connection
Liion
battery
module
Inverter control
14
Data logging
15
Battery management
TIP04_13_146_EN
AC/DC
16
17
273
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
9
Customer with h contract
10
Electricity supplier
Forecast optimisation
150
kWh
11
Energy purchase
100
50
Dependencies
between
power generation, use,
and energy demand
as well as captive
generation and storage
behaviour
12
13
-50
0:15
6:15
0:15
Forecast
Energy forecast
kWh
9,000
8,000
7,000
6,000
5,000
4,000
3,000
2,000
1,000
0
14
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Smart meter
15
Forecast management
Schedule
kWh
2,000
16
Limit
Consumption
11:05
11:10
11:15
Controlling/
regulating
1,800
- Consumption
- Generation
- Storage
1,000
1,600
1,400
1,200
800
600
400
200
0
17
Fig. 13/12: Transparency of the energy flows
274
Schedule
TIP04_13_147_EN
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
11:00
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
The evaluated scenario assumes aforecast for sun radiation. The peak value for the feed-in curve is then calculated
day-specifically in such away that it yields the forecast
energy quantity together with the ideal PV curve shape,
which is equal to the energy quantity from the PV output
curve for the individual day. Though the peak of the ideal
7
8
9
PV system
SIESTORAGE
10
1,200 kW
600 kW
1,000 kW
400 kW
800 kW
200 kW
600 kW
0 kW
400 kW
-200 kW
200 kW
-400 kW
0 kW
08/02
08/03
08/04
08/05
08/06
08/07
08/08
11
12
-600 kW
08/02
08/09
08/03
08/04
08/05
08/06
08/07
08/08
08/09
13
14
Power distribution
1,000 kW
800 kW
600 kW
15
400 kW
200 kW
08/03
08/04
08/05
08/06
08/07
08/08
08/09
Consumers
Fig. 13/13: Power supply concept integrating photovoltaics and aSIESTORAGE energy storage system
TIP04_13_148_EN
0 kW
08/02
16
17
275
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1,000 kW
PV system
Feed-in curve
800 kW
600 kW
TIP04_13_149_EN
400 kW
200 kW
10
0 kW
08/02
11
08/03
08/04
08/05
08/06
08/07
08/08
08/09
Fig. 13/14: Weekly curve of PV power and the desired feed-in power according to the forecast about sun radiation
provided the day before
12
600 kWh
13
Storage load
min
max
400 kWh
14
0.9 MWh
200 kWh
0 kWh
08/02
15
08/03
08/04
08/05
08/06
08/07
08/08
08/09
-400 kWh
16
-600 kWh
17
Fig. 13/15: Weekly curve of the energy required which astorage system is to supply, respectively take in, based
on the power ratios fromFig. 13/14
276
TIP04_13_150_EN
-200 kWh
Chapter 14
Energy Management
14.1 Measured Variables for
Energy Transparency
14.2 Graphic Representations in
Energy Management
14.3 Evaluation Profiles
14.4 Characteristic Values
14.5 Electricity Market Observations
14.6 Operational Management
14.7 Normative Basis for an
Energy Management System
279
281
284
284
286
291
292
Con
tents
Intro
duction
14 Energy Management
High supply and operational reliability as well as flexible
useare the key factors of every modern power distribution
system. In view of the increasing share of energy costs in
the overall operating costs of abuilding, an operating cost
optimisation is aplanning criterion which should not be
neglected. Essential elements are an ecologically and
economically focused optimisation of energy consumption
and thus of energy costs. Even in the design stage, energy
analyses are called for. When basic data is established and
pre-planning work is carried out, which corresponds to
phase 1 and 2 according to the Regulation of Architects'
and Engineers' Fees (HOAI) in Germany, targets must be
agreed upon as to the kind of energy to be utilised and the
measuring systems to be employed and an energy concept
must be developed.
2
3
4
5
6
Based on the energy flows in the building, energy transparency, energy management, and energy efficiency all interact. Data collection and processing ensure energy transparency on which energy management as aprocess is based.
abuilding's energetic efficiency is directly influenced by the
integration of automation systems and the definition of
energy efficiency levels for the equipment based on client
Fig. 14/1
specifications (Fig.
14/1).
7
8
Energy efficiency
10
11
12
13
Energy transparency
14
15
16
17
278
Energy management
The VDI 4602 Sheet 1 guideline defines energy management as follows: Energy management is the clear-sighted,
organisational, and systematized coordination of procurement, conversion, distribution and usage of energy to meet
requirements whilst taking ecological and economical
objectives into account. All resources enabling this coordination are defined in this directive as energy management
systems: Energy management systems comprise the
organisational and information structures required to put
energy management into practice. This includes the technical resources involved, such as software and hardware.
If energy management requirements are to be considered
in addition to personal and system protection, measuring
instruments as part of electrical power distribution must
also be factored in. This is necessary in order to verify the
implementation and operation of anenergy management
system such as ISO 50001. For the planning work, this
means identifying measuring points at an early stage,
defining the scope of measurements and specifying measuring instruments. Without metrology there is no energy
transparency and thus no energy management.
Even during the planning process, electrical designers are
increasingly expected to consider the life cycle costs.
However, the limits established when dimensioning the
electrical energy distribution are unsuitable for determining
the cost for losses which reflect actual operating conditions. The power losses of transformers, busbar trunking
systems, and cabling figure prominently in life cycle cost
calculations under the envisaged operating conditions.
Current is factored in with its square value.
For an ohmic load, power loss Pv is calculated
from (current I, specific resistance R):
Pv = I2 R
The cost losses are the product of electricity price and
power losses. However, without arealistic load curve for
the period under review, it is not possible to obtain an
estimation of power consumption that reflects operating
conditions. After all to establish the energy losses, the
time-specific power losses characterised by the load curve
are integrated by way of the period under consideration
and in connection with the electricity prices the contribution to the life cycle costs is defined.
On average, 5% of the energy procured is dissipated into
heat as energy losses within an electrical power distribution
system. Owing to consumption-optimised dimensioning of
individual distribution system components, such as transformers, busbar trunking systems, and cables in keeping
Con
tents
Intro
duction
14.1 M
easured Variables for Energy
Transparency
3
4
5
6
7
Electricity Supplier
Power Management
- Coordination of purchase
activities
- Covering application
requirements
- Following economic/
ecological goals
Distribution
System Operator
8
9
Power Distribution
Feed-in
10
Transformer
Generator
(in-plant power generation)
11
Energy Transparency
12
- Documentation and
evaluation of energy flows
Distribution
UPS
13
14
Energy Efficiency
Application
Automation
15
16
Lighting
Drives
Consumers
TIP04_13_152_EN
Fig. 14/1: From energy management to energy efficiency with the help of energy transparency
17
279
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
Recommended Measurements
Feedin
Transformer
U
I
S
cos
THD
Generator
Distribution
10
11
M
Drives
12
P
M
Consumers
13
U, I, S of all 3 phases
Power factor
of all 3 phases
THD of all 3 phases
or
I
cos
U
I
P
W
cos
U, I, P, W of all
3 phases
Power factor
of all 3 phases
I of all 3 phases
cos of all 3 phases
I I, P of all 3 phases
P Power factor
cos of all 3 phases
P
Leased equipment
I
cos
I of all 3 phases
Power factor
of all 3 phases
Billing meter
TIP04_14_153_EN
14
15
16
for lighting
3%
5%
6%
8%
*) The voltage drop is preferably not to exceed the values for public grids
Tab. 14/1: Permitted voltage drop in accordance with IEC 60364-5-52 (VDE 0100-520) from the distribution network/consumer installation
interface to the connection point of an item of equipment (mains equipment up to 100 m in length)
17
280
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
8,000 kW
TIP04_13_154_EN
14.2 G
raphic Representations in
Energy Management
7,000 kW
6,000 kW
5,000 kW
2
3
4,000 kW
3,000 kW
2,000 kW
1,000 kW
1 kW
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50 kW
6,000 kW
5,000 kW
Load curve
Maximum
5%
10 %
4,000 kW
Load curves
Load curves are graphs of measured values in their chronological order. Time is entered on the X-axis, measured
values are entered on the Y-axis.
3,000 kW
2,000 kW
1,000 kW
1 kW
TIP04_13_155_EN
CW 53
CW 1
CW 2
CW 3
CW4
10
11
The evaluation of yearly load curves is suitable for providing an overview on:
Load pattern
Continuity over months
Electricity peaks at certain points in time over the year
Seasonal variations
Operating holidays and other special operating situations
Minimum performance requirements as load base
The graph of amonthly load curve (Fig. 14/4) may be
utilised to demonstrate apossibly typical behaviour:
Similarities of power purchase
Continuity at the weekends
Purchased power over night (i.e. power consumption)
Base load
Bank holidays/bridging days/weekends and other
'operations closed' days
12
13
14
15
16
17
281
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The weekly load curve (Fig. 14/5) brings out clear dayspecific differences:
Daily demand
Daily variations
Typical work-shift patterns
Demand peaks
5,000 kW
4,000 kW
3,000 kW
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
TIP04_13_156_EN
6,000 kW
2,000 kW
1,000 kW
1 kW
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
6,000 kWh
5,000 kWh
12
Early Shift
TIP04_13_157_EN
Late Shift
4,000 kWh
3,000 kWh
2,000 kWh
1,000 kWh
1 kWh
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
13
Office building with air-conditioning system
14
2.20
2.20
2.23
1.80
1.80
Mon - Thurs
1.60
Fr
Sat + Sun
1.40
Mean value
1.20
16
Peak factor
Factor
Factor
2.00
15
2.03
2.00
1.60
Mon - Thurs
1.40
Fr
1.20
Sat + Sun
1.00
Peak factor
1.00
0.80
0.80
0.60
Mean value
0.40
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
5:00
6:00
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
16:00
17:00
18:00
19:00
20:00
21:00
22:00
23:00
0:00
0.60
Time
1:00
2:00
3:00
4:00
5:00
6:00
7:00
8:00
9:00
10:00
11:00
12:00
13:00
14:00
15:00
16:00
17:00
18:00
19:00
20:00
21:00
22:00
23:00
0:00
2.40
17
Time
TIP04_13_158_EN
Fig. 14/7: Examples of synthetic load curves for specifying the power consumption in offices
282
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Power loss in kW
12.0
11.0
Transformer type:
10.0
9.0
8
9
10
60 %
11
45 %
12
8.0
7.0
6.0
Note: Power consumption values are laid down in guidelines and standards which can be utilised for classifying
the mean values. Where as the German VDI Guideline
3807-4 takes into account the entire electric power consumption for buildings, the values from EnEV 2009 only
consider the electricity demand for the heating, ventilation
and air-conditioning installations in them, thus ignoring
the electricity needed for building use itself.
13
30 %
5.0
4.0
14
3.0
15 %
2.0
Load profile:
1.0
0.0
0
150
0%
300
450
600
Transformer load in kVA
TIP04_13_159_EN
15
16
17
283
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
Load profile
In terms of the load profile, the power values are shown on
the X-axis and the number of hours in which the respective
value was measured are shown on the Y-axis. The power
profile, which is based on the power values measured every
15minutes, starts with the base load and ends with the
maximum purchased power. The load profile allows you to
identify power core areas, meaning the most frequently
required power values of aplant or system (Fig. 14/9).
5
6
7
Frequency distribution
9
10
11
Since the number of hours is shown in an ascending fashion, the frequency distribution curve begins with the
maximum purchased power and ends with the base load.
The frequency distribution allows conclusions to be drawn
12
Fig. 14/11),
14/11 the highest
In the maxima representation (Fig.
measured power values including the time stamp are
entered in adescending order. Two reference lines are
frequently drawn to mark apeak load reduction by 5% or
10% respectively. amaxima power view clearly shows in
how many 15-minute intervals aload management system
should have intervened and with which power reductions
in order not to exceed adefined peak value. Variants of the
maxima view map adaytime-specific distribution of load
peaks, or show monthly maxima to enable the identification of leverage for load management improvements or an
altered plant management.
14
TIP04_13_160_EN
300 h
250 h
200 h
15
8,000 kW
7,000 kW
Frequency distribution
Mean curve progression
6,000 kW
5,000 kW
150 h
4,000 kW
100 h
3,000 kW
TIP04_13_161_EN
13
2,000 kW
5h
16
0 kW
17
1,000 kW
1,000
2,000
3,000
4,000
5,000
6,000
284
7,000
0 kW
0h
1,000
2,000 3,000
4,000 5,000
6,000
Fig. 14/10: Frequency distribution over one year and mean curve
progression
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TIP04_13_162_EN
4,000 kW
3,900 kW
3,800 kW
10
11
3,700 kW
12
3,600 kW
3,500 kW
13
3,400 kW
3,300 kW
15min. value
3,904 kW
3,856 kW
3,848 kW
3,848 kW
3,832 kW
3,824 kW
10
11
12
Date/Time
11.1.10 10:45
11.1.10 10:45
11.1.10 8:15
11.1.10 8:15
13.1.10 8:15
13.1.10 8:15
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
14
15
16
17
285
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15.5
12
13
Present
AEP
21,160,000 kWh
7,086 kW
3,178,000
Ct
15.02 kWh
23,511,492 kWh
7,086 kW
3,436,500
Ct
14.62 kWh
23,511,492 kWh
6,400 kW
3,351,500
Ct
14.25 kWh
15.0
14.5
14.0
Price
Negotations
Reduced energy charge
10 % to 9.9 Ct/kWh
13.5
14
Ct
13.52 kWh
13.0
15
12.5
2,800
16
Ct
12.83 kWh
2,900
3,000
3,100
3,200
3,300
3,400
3,500
3,600
3,700
Usage period in h
3,800
TIP04_13_163_EN
AEP in Ct/kWh
11
Lower Consumption
10 %
17
Fig. 14/12: Example of an "optimisation window" for the average price of electricity
286
Con
tents
Intro
duction
14.5.2 SmartGrid
The term "Smart Grid" describes the intelligent interplay of
power generation, storage, distribution, and consumption
Fig. 14/13
as an energy and cost-efficient overall system (Fig.
14/13).
In adistributed and differentiated energy system, power
generation and consumption must be balanced to the
extent that today's quality standards (EN60150) retain
their validity. For the smart grid, grid modernisation and
optimisation mainly affecting the distribution networks are
very much to the fore. The following requirements placed
on their operators impact on the interface between smart
grid and consumer.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Energy Management
287
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Biomass power station
2
3
Energy
management
system
Energy exchange
Billing
4
5
Communication Network
CHP
Weather service
6
Concentrator
7
8
Wind power
station
PV system
Influenceable
loads
10
Fuel cell
Distributed
mini-CHPs and
PV systems
Distributed loads
TIP04_13_164_EN
Communications
unit
11
Fig. 14/13: Energy management in the smart grid through communication effected across all energy networks
12
13
14
15
16
17
288
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Power grids
Electricity
exchange
Transmission grid
Amprion
Tennet TSO
Transnet BW
50 hertz transmission
Distribution network
Power supplier
Consumer / Customer
TIP04_13_165_EN
Municipal utilities
services
~ 1,000
Regional power stations
Transmission grid
Transmission grids represent national ultra-high voltage
power grids (e.g. 220kV, 380kV) transferring large
quantities of energy over considerable distances. The
associated service companies running the transmission
grid infrastructure are the transmission system operators
(TSO). They ensure voltage and frequency stability under
EN50160 and, if necessary, must procure the control
power needed for frequency and voltage control on the
electricity market. These companies also ensure that the
electricity traders/suppliers are in aposition to direct the
required quantities of electricity across the grids. On the
basis of EC Directive 1228/2003/EC and electricity
instruction 2003/54/EC, adescription of the network
andsystem regulations for Germany are given in the
Transmission Code
Distribution grid
The distribution grid assumes the task of supplying the
area at large with electricity. The electricity itself is either
acquired from the transmission grid or from distributed
power generators. Operation is the responsibility of the
DSO. He is also responsible for metering (exception: the
requirement in Germany is for the metering to be carried
out by ametering operator). The DSO also sees that the
energy quality in keeping with EN 50160 is upheld. He
supplies the electricity to the consumers on the low- and
medium-voltage level. The assignments and obligations
of the DSOs in Germany are saved in the Distribution
Code
Metering operator
The metering operator operates the metering equipment
between DSO and consumers. He ensures that the metering point operates properly and provides the readings to
both consumer and DSO. An obligation came into being
in Germany in 2010 for smart meters to be fitted in all
new buildings and for modernisations. The consumer is
free to choose his/her metering operator
Electricity exchange
The EEX (European Energy Exchange) amarket place for
energy and energy-related products. It arose from merging the Frankfurt and Leipzig electricity exchanges and is
based in Leipzig with offices in Brussels, London and
Paris. Traders from 22 countries currently participate in
the exchange. As apublic institution, the EEX is subject to
German stock exchange legislation. Trading is done in
spot and futures market products, such as base and peak.
adistinction is made between day-ahead and continuously possible intraday auctions on the spot market for
Germany/Austria, France and Switzerland. On the dayahead market, hour and unit bids are traded for the
following day, whilst on the intraday market this relates
to individual hours (individual contracts) for delivery up
to 45 minutes before its start
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
289
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Electricity traders
Only authorized traders are allowed to operate at the
exchange. They implement the orders of the power
suppliers at the exchange
Power supplier
The power supplier is the bridge between power generators and electricity consumers. He forecasts his electricity
demand and covers this directly with the power generators and the electricity exchange. The power supplier
concludes electricity supplier contracts with his customers. anumber of energy service contracts are also on
offer which along with the supply of electricity incorporate contracts with the DSO (grid connection contract,
grid utilisation contract)
Consumer
The consumer buys electrical energy in order to operate
his applications. Commercially viewed, he concludes
acontract with the power supplier; whereas the supply is
physically undertaken by the DSO
2
3
4
5
6
7
Given that the power market as with any other commercial market exists from predicting supply and demand,
increasing importance is attached to the forecasts for
consumption demand/power generation supply and to
their adherence. The smart grid as the link of many low-
capacity and large-scale power stations as well as the
exchange is very much dependent on steadfast forecasts.
Consumer forecasts can be monitored on-line if smart
meters are introduced across the board. In this way, the
costs which the power supplier has from any variations
from the forecast can be directly allocated to the party
having caused them. In view of the fact that no 100%
forecast is possible by consumers and that variations from
it result in additional costs, the need is for load management here for aligning actual consumption to the forecast.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
290
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Distribution:
Switching
Current
P
M
Measuring
9
4.000 kW
300 h
8,000 kW
Maximum value
3.500 kW
7,000 kW
250 h
6,000 kW
2.000 kW
100 h
2,000 kW
6,000 kW
1,000 kW
1
5,000 kW
10
15
4,000 kW
20
25Lastgang
30
Maximum
5%
10 %
35
40
45
0 kW
50 KW
1.000
3.000
4.000
5.000
6.000
7.000
0 kW
0:15
5.000 kW
3.000 kW
2.000 kW
5,000 kW
1.000 kW
4,000 kW
KW 53
500 kW
6.000
kW
2.000
4.000 kW
6,000 kW
1,000 kW
1 kW
1.000 kW
7.000 kW
2,000 kW
KW 1
3,000 kW
KW 2
2,000 kW
KW 3
0 kW
KW 4
1,000 kW
9.000 h
6,000 kWh
Frhschicht
Controlling:
1.500 kW
8.000 kW
5h
3,000 kW
Minimum value
2.500 kW
150 h
3,000 kW
Mean value
3.000 kW
200 h
5,000 kW
4,000 kW
1 kW
Sptschicht
4.000 kW
3.500 kW
3.000 kW
2.500 kW
2.000 kW
1.500 kW
1.000 kW
500 kW
0 kW
0:15
3:15
Monday
6:15
9:15
12:15
15:15
18:15
21:15
Current
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
20 %
3:15
5,000 kWh
1 kW
15 %
6:15
9:15
10 %
15:15
18:15
3:15
6:15
9:15
21:15
Friday
Saturday
0%
Sunday
-5 %
3,000 kWh
Mean value
Minimum value
0:15
12:15
15:15
18:15
11
21:15
-10 %
2,000 kWh
-15 %
-20 %
1,000 kWh
1 kWh
0
-25 %
2
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
-30 %
24
10
ISO 50001
Maximum value
12:15
5%
4,000 kWh
Protecting
6,000 kW
5,000 kW
12
Forecast:
4,000 kW
Current
3,000 kW
2,000 kW
1,000 kW
13
1 kW
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
14
Current
Heat
Primary energy
Energy
supplier
Current
Emission
CO2
District
heating
kWh
kWh
CO2
CO2
m3
CO2
Biomass
Biogas
Boiler
Fossil
Regenerative
Current
Heat
m3
CO2
CHP
Fossil
Regenerative
Solar
Thermal, photovoltaics
Wind
Geothermy
Heat pump
Cold
Storage cell
Storage cell
Energy application
Consumption
Current
Heat
Absorber
Compressor
Gas
Operational management:
Purchase forecasts
15
Generating forecasts
Consumption forecasts
Horizontally integrated optimisation
Deployment optimisation
Cold
TIP04_13_196_EN
16
17
Fig. 14/15: Operational view of electric power distribution and incorporation into the operational management
291
Con
tents
Intro
duction
14.7 N
ormative Basis for an Energy
Management System
3
4
Playing an increasingly important role is energy consumption, as attested to by the stipulations of government and
society concerning energy and the environment. Thus the
necessity to optimise energy consumption entails considerable efforts on the part of the companies. They include:
Reducing costs
Strengthening company future prospects from clearsighted consideration being given to rising energy costs
Keeping to emission targets either imposed by governments or set down by the companies themselves
Promoting sustainability of energy use and lessening
dependence on fossil energy sources
Improving the standing of the company on matters of
responsibility within society
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
292
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
An EnMS includes self-appraisal as to adherence to statutory regulations and execution of internal audits at scheduled intervals. Both need to be documented and areport
drafted for senior management. Any variations and
9
10
11
Energy policy
Management
review
13
Ch
Checking
ec
Monitoring,
metering, and
analysis
ISO 50001
Internal auditing of
the EnMS
Non-conformities,
corrections, corrective and
preventive actions
14
15
TIP04_13_167_EN
Management
systems
ct
12
Introduction and
implementation
an
Pl
Energy planning
16
17
Fig. 14/16: Implementation of the PDCA management cycle for EnMS in ISO50001
293
Con
tents
Intro
duction
nob-conformities are to be recorded. Corrective and preventive measures are to be defined and examined as to
effectiveness. It is the responsibility of senior management
to check on the EnMS at defined intervals and document
the findings.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
siemens.com/tip-cs/contact
12
13
14
15
16
17
294
Chapter 15
SIMARIS Planning Tools
for the Efficient Planning
of Power Distribution
15.1 Dimensioning
with SIMARISdesign
15.2 Determining Space Requirements
with SIMARISproject
15.3 Displaying Characteristic Curves
with SIMARIS curves
15.4 Tool Efficiency
297
298
299
299
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
Since the requirements for the equipment of non-residential
and industrial buildings as well as the expectations with
regard to system safety and documentation are steadily
increasing, the planning of electric power distribution
becomes more and more demanding and complex. The
SIMARIS planning tools support you in planning power
distribution systems in buildings and allow for convenient
and easy operation thanks to well designed user interfaces and functions which can be used intuitively. To help
you familiarise and work with the SIMARIS planning tools,
tutorials, help files, and a Technical Manual are integrated in
the programs. These aids can also be directly downloaded at
2
3
4
5
siemens.com/simaris/help
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Fig. 15/2: Defining the longest fire section for a busbar trunking system in
SIMARIS design
13
14
15
16
17
296
Totally Integrated Power SIMARIS Planning Tools for the Efficient Planning of Power Distribution
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power SIMARIS Planning Tools for the Efficient Planning of Power Distribution
297
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
siemens.com/simarisproject
Depending on the type of system, the systems are represented graphically or in list form. For example, the elec
trical designer can directly select and graphically place
thepanels required for the medium-voltage switchgear,
whereas selected transformers and the components required for the busbar trunking systems are presented inlist
form. It is also possible to factor in the functional endurance of busbar trunking systems, especially for power
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Fig. 15/4: System planning with SIMARIS project
298
Totally Integrated Power SIMARIS Planning Tools for the Efficient Planning of Power Distribution
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
siemens.com/simariscurves
7
8
9
10
11
12
Fig. 15/5: Characteristic curves (fuse, moulded-case circuit-breaker, air circuit-breaker) in SIMARIS curves
13
14
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power SIMARIS Planning Tools for the Efficient Planning of Power Distribution
299
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
300
Totally Integrated Power SIMARIS Planning Tools for the Efficient Planning of Power Distribution
Chapter 16
Lighting Inside Buildings
16.1 Basic Data Establishment
16.2 Building Analysis
16.3 Normative Specifications
16.4 Lighting Scheme
16.5 Lighting Calculation
16.6 Emergency Lighting
302
305
305
312
318
329
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
302
illuminances. Numerous brochures state typical characteristic values that refer specifically to this standard.
The data for the illuminance maintenance value (Em), the
maximum unified glare rating limit value (UGRL) for discomfort glare assessment, the minimum uniformity ratio of
illuminance (U0) and the minimum value of the colour
rendering index (Ra) should be agreed with the client. In
view of an increasing consideration of the biological effect
of light, these parameters have to be regarded more intensely in the planning phase.
For the purpose of integrated planning, the electrical
designer should know the basic task of lighting designers
and architects and be able to synchronise with them. Therefore, crucial points in the creation of alighting scheme will
be dealt with in the following (see Fig. 16/1
16/1). First of all,
the prerequisites for the normative clarifications are created
within the scope of abuilding analysis. Then, the lighting
scheme is created and the lighting calculations are made.
To find optimal lighting solutions, interdependencies
between lighting and work task, workflows, working appliances and tools, furnishing, workplace layout, interior and
building design have to be considered (see Fig. 16/2
16/2). This
becomes noticeable in energy and economic efficiency as
well as in soft factors such as orientation, well-being and
naturalness.
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
16.1 Basic data
establishment
2
3
16.2 Building
analysis
Project analysis
Zoning in detail
First technology concept for technical building
equipment is available (control system, bus systems etc.)
Faade details are known (daylight factor)
Ceiling system is known
4
5
6
Energy efficiency
European level
EN 12464-1
European level
Directive 2012/27/EU,
Directive 2010/31/EU
(2006/32/EC, 2002/91/EC)
Germany
DIN 5035-7/-8
ASR A3.4
16.5 Lighting
calculation
Germany
EnEV 2014 /
DIN V 18599-1, -4, -10
Biological
effect
8
9
10
Germany
DIN Spec 67600
(see also VDI 6008
Sheet 1 and Sheet 3)
11
12
Design principles
Determination of the mounting position
Definition of the light distribution
Consideration of daylight and lighting management
Determination of the illuminants
Selection of the luminaires
13
14
15
TIP04_13_175_EN
16.4 Lighting
scheme
16
17
303
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
Building:
Climate
Building orientation
Surroundings
Lighting management
Room:
Windows / doors
Walls / ceilings / floors
Sun protection
Colours
Reflections
4
5
Light:
Luminaires
Illuminants
Mounting position
Furnishings:
Tables, desks
Chairs
Cabinets
Shelves
High desks
Accessories:
Pictures, boards, calendars
Curtains
Plants
6
7
People
8
Safety:
Personal safety
Occupational health and safety
Orientation ability
Feeling:
Well-being
Natural vision
Work task
Workflows
Communication needs
9
10
Working appliances:
Monitor, computer,
Keyboard
Writing materials
Projector / screen
Control panel
Working equipment:
Treatment chair
Workbench
Conveyor belt
Test facility
TIP04_13_176_EN
11
Light colour
Light distribution
Daylight utilisation
Energy efficiency
12
13
14
15
16
17
304
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
305
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
Based on the flow diagram depicted in Fig. 16/2, the normative bases with regard to technology, energy consumption and the biological effect of lighting inside buildings
will be touched in the following.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
306
Background
Immediate surroundings
Visual task
TIP04_13_177_EN
Fig. 16/3: The visual task area with immediate surroundings (strip
of 0.5m beyond the visual field) and background area (within the
room limits at least 3m wide)
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Illuminance
visual task
inlx
Illuminance
immediate surroundings
inlx
750
500
500
300
300
200
200
= Evisual task
where
LSF Lamp survival factor
LMF Luminaire maintenance factor
RSMF Room surface maintenance factor
Criteria influencing the MF:
Use of lamps with lower or higher luminous flux collection (dependent on the burning time)
Disposition to dust accumulation in luminaires
Dust and smoke exposure of lamps and luminaires due to
the room utilisation and environmental influences (may
lead to discolouring/yellowing)
5
6
Controlled lighting
TIP04_13_178_EN
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
Controlled lighting
Time
13
Power demand
in W
Illuminance
in lx
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance
value Em
Maintenance value
Maintenance factor
Time
17
307
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
308
EnEV 2009 has been revised to EnEV 2014 for two reasons:
1. Transposition of Directive 2012/27/EU with higher
requirements into German law
2. Reference to the new pre-standard series DINV18599.
For the lighting, DINV18599-4:2011-12 replaces
DIN18599-4:2007-02 to which EnEV 2009 refers.
Publication of EnEV 2014 was in May 2014.
This also results in achange to the current
DINV185994:2011-12 and for lighting control adaylightdependent control is considered in the constant light
Tab. 16/3
control (Tab.
16/3).
For the planning of energy-efficient lighting in compliance
with EnEV, DINV18599-4 is applied. In that, the different
utilisation zones of the building, the specific electrical
efficiency of artificial light, the consideration of the daylight utilisation and the influence of presence detection
systems are determined.
It has to be noted that EN15193 is aEuropean standard
serving asimilar purpose as DINV18599-4. The exhaustive energy demand calculation method presented in
EN15193 complies with DINV18599-4 (EN15193 is
currently being revised due to the revision of Directive
2010/31/EU on the building efficiency). In the national
annex NA of EN15193 for Germany, it is stated that the
installed illuminance in accordance with DINV18599-4 has
to be determined with one of the following alternatives:
Tabular method
Efficiency factor method
Detailed specialist planning
Software-based tools considering all installations are
provided for the calculation. The electrical and lighting
planning engineer can use, for example, the lighting calculation programs DIALux or RELUX to calculate the reference
value to be observed for the energy demand. The lighting
calculation programs are able to calculate the value for the
net energy demand of the lighting by applying the formulas described in DINV18599-4.
More information about DIALux and RELUX can be obtained
on the Internet at: osram.com/osram_com/tools-andservices/tools/dialux-and-relux/index.jsp
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Lighting control
Presence control
effected manually
otherwise
Daylight-dependent control
effected manually
all
available
not available
otherwise
Presence control
Lighting control
5
6
effected manually
otherwise
Daylight-dependent control in
combination with constant light
control is effected in accordance
with DINV18599-4:2011-12
Section 5.5.4
effected manually
otherwise
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
309
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
Lighting
8
9
10
11
13
14
Recognition of pictures
Brightness, lighting
Contrast
Shapes
Movement
Perception
Information
15
Nonvisual path
Moods, impressions
16
17
Relaxation, tension
Concentration, unrest
Well-being, discomfort
Activity, restraint
Security, unease
Confidence, caution
310
Circadian rhythm
Internal clock
Attention, fatigue
Hormone production
Vitality, relaxation
Blood circulation
Metabolism
TIP04_13_179_EN
Visual path
12
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1.6
1.4
17,000 K
14,000 K
1.2
D75
D65
D55
D50
1.0
0.8
TIP04_13_180_EN
Biological efficiency
in acc. with DIN V 5031-100
8,000 K
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
F10
0.6
F11
0.4
15
F12
0.2
0
0
5,000
Planckian radiator
Daylight spectrum
10,000
15,000
Standard illuminants
Fluorescent lamps
Halogen lamps
LED
16
20,000
Correlated colour
temperature
in K
17
311
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Minimum 0.5 m
11
EU
EU
EU
12
Minimum 3 m
13
EH = 1/3 EU
14
15
EU
16
Visual task
EH
Immediate surroundings
EU
Background
17
312
TIP04_13_181_EN
EU
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
16.4.2 Illuminants
The light quality is primarily determined by the selection of
the illuminants. Specific properties such as light colour,
colour rendering, efficiency, dimming behaviour, and
dimensions should be considered for the selection and
combination of illuminants.
The selection of the light colour is amatter of taste, design
and application. The light colours influence the room
atmosphere: warm white light is mainly perceived as cosy
and comfortable, neutral white light rather as unemotional.
The light of lamps with the same light colour may have
different colour rendering properties. The minimum values
for the colour rendering property (colour rendering indexes
Ra) are stated in the tables of DINEN12464-1 dependent
on the areas of activity. For acomprehensive overview of
the illuminants, refer to the Appendix.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
313
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
The requirements of IEC62471 (VDE0837-471) for photobiological safety regulate the protection of skin and eye
against optical radiation [25]. This standard must also be
observed for CE marking. Depending on the degree of
danger, lamps are classified into four different groups. Risk
group 3 is not allowed for general lighting and risk group 2
must be marked as described in the standard. Risk groups 0
and 1 need no marking. The standard IEC60598-1
(VDE0711-1) points out that luminaires require the application of IEC62471 (VDE0837-471).
5
6
7
Safety class I
Safety class II
8
9
10
III
III
11
12
First code figure
13
14
15
16
Electrical properties
The electrical properties of the luminaire are decisive for
safe and fault-free operation. The case of application plays
an important part for luminaire selection.
These electrical properties are generally regarded as
important:
Protection against excessively high touch voltage
withsafety classes in accordance with IEC61140
(VDE0140-1, see Tab.16/4)
Protection against the ingress of foreign bodies and
moisture with the degrees of protection in accordance
with IEC60529 (VDI 0470-1, see Tab.16/5)
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC in accordance with
EN55015/VDE0875-15-1, IEC61000-3-2/VDE0838-2
and IEC61000-3-3/VDE0838-3)
Immunity to interference in accordance with IEC61547
(VDE0875-15-2)
Exposition of persons to electromagnetic fields
(IEC 62493/VDE 0848-493)
Fire protection
Protection against flying balls: In gymnasiums, balls
hitting luminaires at full tilt must not damage these so
severely that parts of it fall down (VDE0710-13)
To meet the safety requirements on lighting, the luminaires
must comply with the standard series IEC60598
(VDE0711). As aprerequisite for that, also the associated
electrical components must comply with the relevant safety
regulations (for example, the standard series
IEC61347/VDE0712 for equipment). Moreover, also the
so-called performance requirements for the equipment's
principle of operation should be considered and observed.
To indicate conformity with the standards, the luminaires
should carry the ENEC approval mark.
Second code figure
Not protected
Not protected
Rain/spray-proof
Splash-proof
Dust-accumulation protected
Jet-proof
Dust-penetration protected
Strong jet-proof
Watertight
Pressure watertight
17
Tab. 16/5: Degrees of protection in accordance with IEC 60529 (VDE 0470-1)
314
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
Degrees of protection
The degree of protection of aluminaire indicates whether
it is suitable for the desired lighting application and can
be operated safely. The luminaires must be constructed
such that no foreign bodies or moisture can ingress. The
degree of protection is indicated on the luminaire; the IP
code is applied for marking. The first code figure after the
abbreviation IP (international protection) describes the
protection against the ingress of foreign bodies, the
second code figure the protection against the ingress of
water (see Tab. 16/5).
Constructional properties
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
315
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
Downlights are special, normally round ceiling luminaires fitted with reflectors and other optical elements
(such as Lunis 2), which can also be swivel-mounted.
They are available as recessed downlights for recessed
mounting in ceilings and as surface downlights for
surface mounting on ceilings.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
316
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
For more information, see siteco.com/en/uk_en/products/
indoor-luminaires-catalogue.html
15
16
17
317
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
pj =
kA Em
MF S LB R
pj
Electrical efficiency
referred to the floor area considered
Reduction factor, considering the boundaries
of the visual task
Maintenance value of illuminance in accordance
with DIN V 18599-10
System light output of illuminant plus equipment
Light output ratio of the luminaire applied
Room efficiency factor
Maintenance factor
kA
Em
S
LB
R
MF
9
10
nz=
11
En A
n
z
En
A
B
R
MF
13
14
N =
N
tot
En A
MF
tot = n z
N
tot
k=
ab
hN (a + b)
B R MF
Where
Where
12
B R =
Where
Where
Number of luminaires
Number of lamps per luminaire
Rated illuminance
Floor area of the room
Luminous flux of lamp
Total luminous efficacy
Room efficiency factor
Maintenance factor
a
b
hN
Room depth
Room width
For "direct" or mainly "direct" lighting: difference
in height between luminaire plane and working plane
For "indirect" or mainly "indirect" lighting: difference
in height between ceiling and working plane
15
16
17
318
Con
tents
Intro
duction
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
Type of lighting
direct
direct/indirect
indirect
40
30
3
4
20
10
4
Room index k
8
9
10
11
N
12
m
12
10
13
8
6
14
4
2
15
0
100
200
10
300
TIP04_13_183_EN
0
12 m
400
16
500
Illuminance in lx
17
319
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
siteco.com/en/planning-guide/sample-projects.html
siteco.com/en/planning-guide/lighting-calculation.html
7
8
9
10
Course of daylight
11
Rated illuminance
12
13
14
Power consumption
15
Time
16
Person entering
Person leaving
17
Fig. 16/10: Daylight- and presence-dependent lighting requirements for an assembly facility
320
TIP04_13_184_EN
Con
tents
Intro
duction
By using aLMS for offices and industrial buildings, considerable energy savings can be achieved if adaylight- and
presence-dependent lighting control complements the
Fig. 16/10).
16/10 Light sensors detect the
available daylight (Fig.
existing light level and automatically control the additional
light input. The user can manually control the desired
illuminance any time. If amotion/presence sensor is used
in addition, the lighting only switches on automatically if
people are in or enter the room. This again increases the
savings potential considerably.
As an additional application, LMS allow for dynamic colour
solutions which are easy to integrate and operate. Luminous intensity and colour for effect light can then be
selected dynamically or at the push of abutton. Application
examples for so-called ambience lighting are: shops, showrooms and points of sale (PoS), fitness and wellness areas,
restaurants, bars, hotel lobbies, conference rooms, schools,
universities, further education institutions, faade illumination. For so-called scene-based lighting, moods can be
enhanced or abiological effect can be caused, for example,
activation through ahigh blue component in the light
spectrum with high illuminance.
Typically, one of the following interfaces is used for LMS
control:
Dimming EB with 1...10 V interface:
In this standard solution, ballasts and control unit are
connected via apoled 2-core control line. The control
current intensity determines the dimming position of the
connected EB
DALI for general lighting:
Lighting control, sensors, operating units, electronic
control gear and lamps communicate via the professional
interface standard DALI (digital addressable lighting
interface) and respond optimally to each other. DALI is
amanufacturer-independent interface standard for
dimmable electronic ballasts and provides high functionality as well as easy handling. Via a2-core control
line, amaximum of 64 DALI control gears can be flexibly
controlled either individually or together and in up to 16
groups. Switching and dimming of the lighting is effected
via the control line. Arelay is not required. Important
information such as the lamp status is saved in the
control gear and forwarded to the control unit as information. Advantages as opposed to the 110 V interface
(see Fig. 16/11
16/11):
The selection of the mains phase is independent of the
control line
The DALI control line is protected against reverse
polarity; aspecial bus cable is not required
One control line is sufficient for amaximum of 64 EB in
up to 16 groups
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
15
17
321
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
e. g.
KNX/EIB
L1 L2 L3
e. g.
KNX/EIB
L1 L2 L3
1...10V
1...10V
1...10V
1...10V
1...10V
1...10 V
1...10V
1...10V
1...10V
9
10
11
12
13
14
TIP04_13_185_EN
15
16
17
Fig. 16/11: Comparison of the system design between 110V and DALI
322
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Operating modes
DALI
DALI
DALI
DALI
StepDIM
StepDIM
StepDIM
StepDIM
2)
1)
In mixed installations, special precautions have to be taken when installing the luminaire
DALI must already be available in the existing installation
13
14
15
Autonomous dimming
1)
AstroDIM
AstroDIM
AstroDIM
AstroDIM
16
17
323
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Parameter
50m30m6.5m
Reflectance values
(CWF)
(Ceiling x Walls x Floor)
705020
Maintenance factor
Working plane h
0.75m
5,000 h/a
Em
300 Ix
UGRL
<25
U0
0.6
80
13
14
15
16
17
Fig. 16/12: Lighting concept finding for the refurbishment of an industrial hall (left: 3D view; right: floor plan)
324
Con
tents
Intro
duction
of illuminants is designed to the specific system requirements (see last table in this chapter).
In the industry sector, fluorescent lamps, high intensity
discharge lamps, and LED illuminants are suited for lighting. Fluorescent lamps have ahigh luminous efficacy,
along service life and are available in various light coloursand lengths. The lamps have auniform light distri
bution. Fluorescent lamps are continuously dimmable
(from100% to 1%) so that the system can be automated.
High intensity discharge lamps (metal halide lamps) have
ahigh luminous efficacy, too, as well as very good colour
rendering. In particular lamps with ceramic technology are
suited for high requirements on the colour rendering and
for long burning times. Lamps with ceramic technology are
dimmable subject to restrictions via aspecial electronic
ballast.
LEDs are suitable for all applications. By selecting and
combining suitable LEDs, specific requirements are met.
LEDs have along service life, are highly efficient, have
ahigh switching capability, and can be used for awide
range of operating temperatures (caution at high ambient
temperatures!). LEDs have ahigh shock and vibration
resistance, do not emit any UV and IR radiation, and are
continuously dimmable (from 100% to 1% caution: at
low dimming values, they switch to pulse width modulation (PWM)!).
The selection of the required light distribution curve (in the
example, wide-angle is selected) and illuminants (fluorescent lamp,high intensity discharge lamp, or LED) determines
the selection of the corresponding luminaires. Generally
suitable in industrial areas is strip lighting, as the applied
flexible systems can easily be adapted to changes in the
production flows. Luminaires and spotlights can be applied
at any position on the bar with the aid of adapters.
2
3
k=
ab
hN (a + b)
k=
50 m 30 m
(5 m 0,75 m) (50 m + 30 m)
k = 4,4
n=
Em A
z LB R MF
Software-based solution
In calculation tools such as RELUX or DIALux, the room is
mapped (mind the reflectance coefficients of the boundary
room areas!), the area of the visual task is defined, and the
corresponding reference surfaces are inserted. The luminaire type is selected in the tool's project manager and the
maintenance factor is defined.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
325
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
The calculations with the software tool supply the following piece numbers:
n (DUS, 258W T26, LLB)=90 pieces
n (Modario, 235W T16, EB)=110 pieces
n (Modario, 70W LED, EB)=105 pieces
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
TIP04_13_186
15
16
DUS, T26 2 58 W
17
Modario, T16 2 35 W
Fig. 16/13: Radiation characteristics for the three sample lighting systems
326
Modario, LED 70 W
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
m
30.0
27.5
25.0
22.5
20.0
17.5
15.0
12.5
10.0
7.5
5.0
0.0
0
150
10
15
20
200
25
30
300
35
500
40
45
50 m
TIP04_13_187_EN
2.5
750
Illuminance in lx
Total luminous flux of all lamps:
Total power:
Total power per area:
Em
Emin
Emin/Em (U0)
UGR (8.0H 13.3H)
Position
Type No.
1
105
Reference plane 1
Horizontal
313 lx
252 lx
0.80
24.3
0.75 m
11
12
651,000 lm
7,350 W
4.90 W/m2 (1,500.00 m2)
13
User profile: Industrial activities and crafts Electrical and electronic industry 5.11.5 (EN 12464-1, 8.2011)
Assembly work: rough, e. g. large transformers (Ra > 80.00)
Evaluation area 1
10
14
( 300 lx)
( 0.60)
(< 25.00)
15
Make
SiTECO
Order no.: 5TR202D2T
Luminaire name: Modario
Equipment: 1 LED 840 / 6,200 lm
16
Fig. 16/14: Excerpt of the results of asoftware calculation for the LED lighting system
17
327
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
Luminaire
DUS
Modario
Modario
Designation
T26 258 W
T16 235 W
LED
Radiation characteristics
Wide-angle
Wide-angle
Wide-angle
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
IP20
Type of lamp
T26 258 W
T16 235 W
LED
10,400lm
6,600lm
6,200lm
71.9%
93.4%
100%
7,478lm
6,164lm
6,200lm
0.67
0.67
0.67
Illuminance
322
315
313
Uniformity
0.74
0.76
0.8
145W
79W
70W
52 lm/W
78 lm/W
89 lm/W
6
7
8
95
110
105
20a
20a
20a
7,300 h/a
7,300 h/a
7,300 h/a
1,059 kWh/a
577 kWh/a
511 kWh/a
14
Tab. 16/8: Result overview for the calculations with asoftware tool and basic data for energy cost considerations
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
328
Con
tents
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
Emergency lighting
Standby lighting
TIP04_13_188_EN
Requirements
Installation
Devices
Inspection/maintenance
ISO 23601
Standard series IEC60364
(VDE0100)
IEC60364-5-56 (VDE0100-560)
IEC60364-7-718 (VDE0100-718)
EN50172 (VDE0108-100:2005)
VDEV0108-100
Standard series EN50272
(VDE0510)
EN1838
EN15193
MLAR
EltBauVo
EN50171 (VDE0558-508)
IEC60896-21
IEC60598-2-22 (VDE0711-2-22)
DIN4844-1 and -2
Standard series ISO 3864
Standard series IEC61347
(VDE0712)
EMVG
ArbStttV
MPrfVo
IEC60364-6 (VDE0100-600)
IEC60364-7-718 (VDE0100-718)
EN50172 (VDE0108-100:2005)
VDEV0108-100
EN50171 (VDE0558-508)
Standard series EN50272
(VDE0510)
Manufacturer's instructions
BetrSichV
BGV A3
Tab. 16/9: Statutory bases, standards and guidelines around safety lighting
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
329
Con
tents
6
7
8
9
Self-contained system
Illuminance (lx)
Intro
duction
b)
Stages
b)
15 a)
8 e)
Schools
b)
15
a)
b)
15 a)
High-rise buildings
b)
15
b)
15
b)
0.5
d)
c)
a) Depending
10
11
Tab. 16/10: Safety lighting requirements of physical structures for the gathering of people based on the pre-standard VDE V 0108100:2010 (Note: EN 50172:2004 correlates with VDE 0108-100:2005 and deviates from the newer pre-standard VDE V 0108-100:2010 in
some parts)
12
13
14
15
16
17
330
Con
tents
Intro
duction
self-contained systems
central power supply systems (CPS)
power supply systems with power limitation (LPS)
power generators with defined interruption time in
seconds
specially backed power system
A distinction is made between permanent lights and
standby lights. Safety lights may only be operated
together with the general lighting in rooms and on
emergency escape routes that
can be sufficiently illuminated with daylight
cannot be fully darkened during normal operation
are not permanently occupied
Control and bus systems for safety lighting have to be
independent of the control and bus systems for normal
lighting
Boundary conditions for planning that are dependent on
the building are specified in standards. Asafety lighting
system consists of the following components: safety power
source, distributors, monitoring devices, cabling, luminaires, and rescue signs. First, the power source type
should be determined as the core element of the safety
supply. The systems listed below have specific advantages
(+) and disadvantages ():
Central power supply system (CPS)
++ Cost reduction due to common circuits for continuous
operation, standby mode, and switched permanent
light possible
++ Central monitoring from every peripheral location
possible
++ Monitoring of individual luminaires
++ Cost reduction due to common circuits for continuous
operation, standby mode, and switched permanent
light possible
++ Low follow-up costs
Must be placed in F30/T30 areas (MLAR Sample
Directive on Fireproofing Requirements for Conduits
and Line Systems, 2005)
E30 cabling required down to every fire section (MLAR)
Power supply system with power limitation (LPS)
++ Cost reduction due to common circuits for continuous
operation, standby mode and switched permanent
light possible
++ Central monitoring from every peripheral location
possible
++ Monitoring of individual luminaires possible
++ Cost reduction due to common circuits for continuous
operation, standby mode and switched permanent
light possible
++ Low follow-up costs
Power and energy limitation (for example, 1,500W for
1 h or 500W for 3h)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
331
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
The final circuits from the low power and central power
systems to the luminaires are wired in compliance with the
Sample Directive on Fireproofing Requirements for Conduits and Line Systems (MLAR) in Germany. The advantages of these systems are their relatively short cable paths
and the fact that the energy required in case of afailure is
available in the form of batteries very close to where the
energy is consumed. It is therefore not necessary to build
up and maintain intricate and costly switchgear and cable
networks for standby power distribution.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
TIP04_13_189_EN
13
14
Rescue sign luminaires at escape doors
15
16
17
Fig. 16/16: Safety lighting plan for awhole storey in an office building
332
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Luminaires,
backup systems
Power
consumption
Visual
inspection
Standard test
Luminaire,
batteries
11
Maintenance
FT *
12
BT *
13
Cost of
electricity
Labour cost
for visual
inspection
Cost share
FT/BT *
Labour cost
for test
Luminaire
and battery
replacement
Labour
cost for
maintenance
Maintenance
cost
15
Operating
cost
Time
Cost of emergency light system
14
* FT functional test
BT battery test
TIP04_13_190_EN
Cost of
investment
16
17
333
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Use of LEDs
In the past few years, the luminance of commercially
available LEDs has been increasing considerably. With more
than 100lm/W, high-power diodes supply ten times the
luminous efficacy value of the first LEDs. At the same time,
LEDs provide their full light output immediately after
switch-on, which is adecisive criterion in particular for
emergency lighting. In the draft version of IEC60598-2-22
(Draft VDE0711-2-22), emergency lights with fluorescent
lamps in combination with neon starters are explicitly
excluded from the use in emergency lighting.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
advantage as to the operating costs compared to conventional lamps. Due to the low energy consumption of the
Fig. 16/19)
16/19
LEDs, the battery volumes can be reduced (seeFig.
and the advantages of lithium ion accumulators can be
utilised. Compared to conventional nickel metal hydride
and nickel-cadmium batteries, lithium ion accumulators
provide the following advantages:
Small size
No memory effect
Low self-discharge
Low follow-up costs (about half the follow-up costs)
TIP04_13_191_EN
0.1
0
2.5
Anti-panic lighting
Illuminance
Duration
Readiness
Tab. 16/11: Excerpt of the requirements in EN1838 for the safety lighting of emergency escape routes,
workplaces involving special hazards and for anti-panic lighting
334
333
Other
17
10
back to page
Fig. 16/18: Power estimate for emergency
lighting systems with acentral battery, based on experience
gained with fluorescent lamps at an illuminance of 1lx
16
7.5
Requirements
for ...
14
15
5.0
Con
tents
Intro
duction
The small size of the LED luminaires leaves room for the
architectural integration of emergency lighting. However,
optics and reflectors for the required lighting are to be
considered as well as the temperature conditions in small
installation spaces.
2
3
4
5
113 lx
2m
3m
4 lx
100 %
113 lx
4 lx
113 lx
4 lx
113 lx
8
34 lx
2m
3m
1.2 lx
50 %
34 lx
1.2 lx
34 lx
1.2 lx
34 lx
10
6.6 m
11
15 lx
2m
3m
1.5 lx
10 %
15 lx
12
1.5 lx
13
Emergency operation
Luminaire
Number of
luminaires
emergency
operation
100 %
113
Dimming
level
emergency Emin
[lx]
operation
Emax
[lx]
Battery current
consumption
per luminaire
[A]
Total battery
current
consumption
[A]
Energy
demand
1:28
0.250
0.750
100 %
g2 =
Emin
Emax
No. 1
Louvre luminaire,
white, 1 58 W
EVG +
CEAG
V-CG-S
No. 2
Louvre luminaire,
white, 1 58 W
CEAG
N-EVG
30 %
1.2
34
1:28
0.110
0.330
44.0 %
No. 3
CEAG GuideLed SL
with asymmetrical
optics
CEAG
V-CGSLS500
100 %
1.5
15
01:10
0.022
0.065
8.6 %
14
TIP04_13_192_EN
Variant
Control
gear
Number of
luminaires
mains
operation
15
16
17
335
Con
tents
Intro
duction
30m and aceiling height of 3m is considered. The requested illuminance for the general lighting is 100lx. For
the emergency lighting, EN1838 requests 1lx minimum at
auniformity
3
4
Functional endurance
Self-contained luminaires do not require any cabling to be
designed in functional endurance, as the luminaire is
supplied by a(usually installed) battery. Thus, the installation expense can be reduced and the costs for smaller
systems are lower than those for acentral supply concept.
The considerable additional expenditure for inspection and
replacement makes more than 20 self-contained luminaires
uneconomical, even if central monitoring systems are
installed.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
a)
b)
c)
14
MDNP
MDNP
MDNP
MDSP
16
17
MDSP
MDSP
Fig. 16/20: Functional endurance for the distributors of asafety lighting system (MDSP=main distribution board
for safety power supply; MDNP =main distribution board for normal power supply)
336
TIP04_13_193_EN
15
Luminous flux
packages
Control gear
1008,400 lm
No
1,000h
1023 lm/W
26044,000 lm
No
2,000h
1228 lm/W
552,300 lm
Transformer
(230 V12 V/24 V)
2,0005,000 h
3390 lm/W
(with EB up to
100 lm/W)
5006,200 lm
EB, LLB
16,00020,000 h
(XXT up to 75,000h)
58114 lm/W
1407,000 lm
EB, LLB
10,00024,000 h
(XT up to 35,000h)
3875 lm/W
2301,940 lm
EB already integrated
8,00020,000 h
48100 lm/W
2006,500 lm
EB
10,00020,000 h
(XT up to 36,000h)
80 lm/W
6,50012,000 lm
EB
60,000h
< 30 lm/W
Irrelevant, depending
on gas filling and
length
Depending on colour
andtube length
(highvoltage)
15,000h
100174 lm/W
1,80032,000 lm
Leak transformer
30,000h
72150 lm/W
3,600130,000 lm
12,00030,000 h
1,80057,000 lm
Reactor, CB
5,00015,000 h
1,700240,000 lm
6,00015,000 h (up
to30,000h in
exceptional cases)
High-power LED
Category
Type of lamp
Thermal radiator
Electric discharge
(low-pressure)
Electric discharge
(high-pressure)
Semiconductor
technology 9)
Mid-power LED
Luminous efficacy 5)
Multi-chip LED
(e.g.COB: chip on board)
OLED
1570 lm
(as at 04/13, sizedependent, i.e.,
increasing)
Up to 50,000h and
more
(among other things
dependent on thermal
management and area
of application)
338
Light colours 7)
Dimming behaviour
Advantages
100
100
100
2,7008,000 K
(ww, nw, dw) 11)
2,7008,000 K
(ww, nw, dw) 11)
2,5004,000 K
(ww, nw) 11)
Rarely dimmable
2,7008,000 K
(ww, nw, dw) 11)
80
3,0004,000 K
Not dimmable
Not dimmable
Yellow (monochrome)
Not dimmable
< 25
2,000K (yellow)
< 60
3,2004,200 K
(ww, nw) 11)
6596
3,0007,250 K
(ww, nw, dw) 11)
Up to 99 (depending on the
Continuous colour control in
composition and selection of the available spectral range 12)
single LEDs; with conventional
RGB mixture possibly lower CRI)
80 (95 and more technically
possible)
2,7006,500 K
(ww, nw, dw) 11)
(depending on the
luminescent substance also
colder possible; typical value
currently 3,500K)
339
Disadvantages
Suitable for
Poor luminous efficacy: less than 5% of the electrical energy is transformed into light
Maintenance-intensive due to short service life only one light colour (ww) 11)
Poor luminous efficacy: less than 10% of the electrical energy is transformed into
light (approx. 2030% more efficient than general service lamps)
Maintenance-intensive due to short service life
Only one light colour (ww) 11)
Temperature-dependent brightness
Temperature-dependent brightness
Usually not dimmable
Switch-on delay
Temperature-dependent brightness
Slow start-up upon ignition (full luminous flux after about 1 5min); usually no hot
restrike ignition (cooling time 0.2515min); not dimmable or only to alimited
extent; filling-dependent colour difference, in particular with quartz technology
(green/red cast)
340
General lighting
341
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
342
343
344
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
E30
Fire section II
6
7
F30
Door
T30
SDSP
9
E30
Fire section I
10
11
F30
Door
T30
12
MDSP
TIP04_13_194_EN
13
14
15
16
17
337
Chapter 17
Appendix
17.1 Characteristics of Grid Supply Types
17.2 List of Standards
17.3 List of Abbreviations
17.4 Bibliography
17.5 Conversion Factors and Tables
346
347
357
361
362
Con
tents
Intro
duction
17 Appendix
17.1 Characteristics of Grid Supply Types
Power sources
Transformer
Generator
UPS
Selection
Requirements
3
4
5
6
Nominal current
IN =
7
Short-circuit currents
IK3 =
SN
3 UN
IN 100 %
UK
IN =
SN
3 UN
IK3, D 3 IN
IN =
SN
3 UN
3
2
10
IK2 IK3
11
IK1 IK3
12
IK1, D 5 IN
13
IK =
14
15
16
IN 100 %
d
Advantages
Distributed availability
Self-contained power supply
Low losses
Voltage stability
Electrical isolation
Disadvantages
IN Nominal current, UN Nominal voltage, UK Rated short-circuit voltage, SN Nominal apparent power
17
346
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Germany
German title
English title
1194/2012/EU
1228/2003/EG
2002/91/EG
2003/54/EG
2004/22/EG
2006/32/EG
2006/42/EG
2014/35/EU
2009/125/EG
2010/30/EU
2010/31/EU
2012/27/EU
244/2009 +
859/2009
245/2009 +
347/2010
89/391/EWG
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
347
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
International
German title
English title
2009/104/EG
Artikel 153
EUVertrag
(2009)
Artikel 114
EUVertrag
(2009)
CIE 97:2005
DACHCZRichtlinie
EN 12193
EN 124641
EN 124642
EN 12665
EN 13201
EN 15193
EN 15232
EN 1838
EN 50160
CLC/TR
602695
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Germany
VDE 06365
EN 50171
VDE 0558508
Zentrale Stromversorgungssysteme
EN 50172
VDE
0108100:2005
Sicherheitsbeleuchtungsanlagen
12
EN 501742
VDE 08001742
13
EN 50272 1
VDE 05101
EN 502722
VDE 05102
EN 504641
VDE 0532221
lgefllte Drehstrom-Verteilungstransformatoren 50
Hz, 50 kVA bis 2500 kVA mit einer hchsten
Spannung fr Betriebsmittel bis 36 kV Teil1:
Allgemeine Anforderungen
EN 505411
VDE 0532241
Drehstrom-Trocken-Verteilungstransformatoren, 50
Hz, 100 bis 3150 kVA, mit einer hchsten Spannung
fr Betriebsmittel kleiner oder gleich 36 kV Teil1:
Allgemeine Anforderungen
EN 55015
VDE 0875151
11
14
15
16
17
348
Con
tents
International
Germany
German title
English title
EN 61100
VDE 03892
HD 639 S1/A2
VDE 066110/A2
Elektrisches Installationsmaterial
Ortsvernderliche Fehlerstrom-Schutzeinrichtungen
ohne eingebauten berstromschutz fr
Hausinstallationen und hnliche Anwendungen
(PRCDs)
IEC 600341
VDE 05301
IEC 60038
VDE 01751
IEC Normspannungen
IEC
60050191
IEC
60050601
IEC
60068230
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
IEC 600711
VDE 01111
IEC 600761
VDE 0532761
IEC 6007611
VDE 05327611
Leistungstransformatoren Teil11:
Trockentransformatoren
IEC 6007612
VDE 05327612
IEC 600762
VDE 0532762
Leistungstransformatoren Teil2:
bertemperaturen fr flssigkeitsgefllte
Transformatoren
IEC 600765
VDE 0532765
Leistungstransformatoren Teil5:
Kurzschlussfestigkeit
IEC 600766
VDE 0532766
IEC 600767
VDE 0532767
Leistungstransformatoren Teil7:
Belastungsrichtlinie fr lgefllte
Leistungstransformatoren
IEC 602041
VDE 01131
IEC 6020411
VDE 011311
IEC
60255151
VDE 04353151
IEC 602691
VDE 06361
13
IEC 602692
VDE 06362
14
IEC 602696
VDE 06366
IEC 602821
VDE 06704
Hochspannungssicherungen Teil1:
Strombegrenzende Sicherungen
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
16
17
349
Con
tents
International
Germany
German title
English title
IEC 60296
VDE 03701
IEC 603641
VDE 0100100
IEC
60364441
VDE 0100410
IEC
60364443
VDE 0100430
IEC
60364552
VDE 0100520
IEC
60364553
VDE 0100530
IEC
60364554
VDE 0100540
IEC
60364556
VDE 0100560
IEC 603646
VDE 0100600
IEC
603647710
VDE 0100710
IEC
603647718
VDE 0100718
IEC
603647729
VDE 0100729
IEC 60529
VDE 04701
IEC 60570
VDE 0711300
IEC 605981
VDE 07111
IEC
60598222
VDE 0711222
Intro
duction
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
IEC 60617DB
14
15
16
IEC 606641
VDE 01101
Insulation coordination for equipment within lowvoltage systems Part1: Principles, requirements
and tests
IEC 608311
VDE 056046
Selbstheilende Leistungs-Parallelkondensatoren fr
Wechselstromanlagen mit einer Nennspannung bis
1 kV Teil1: Allgemeines; Leistungsanforderungen,
Prfung und Bemessung; Sicherheitsanforde
rungen; Anleitung fr Errichtung und Betrieb
IEC
608705101
17
350
Con
tents
International
Germany
German title
English title
IEC
608705104
IEC 6089621
Intro
duction
IEC 608981
VDE 064111
IEC 608982
VDE 064112
IEC 609471
VDE 0660100
IEC 609472
VDE 0660101
Niederspannungsschaltgerte Teil2:
Leistungsschalter
IEC 609473
VDE 0660107
IEC 6094741
VDE 0660102
IEC 6094742
VDE 0660117
IEC 609478
VDE 0660302
Niederspannungsschaltgerte Teil8:
Auslsegerte fr den eingebauten thermischen
Schutz (PTC) von rotierenden elektrischen
Maschinen
IEC
61000212
VDE 0839212
IEC 6100022
VDE 083922
IEC 6100024
VDE 083924
IEC
61000311
VDE 083811
IEC
61000312
VDE 083812
IEC 6100032
VDE 08382
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
351
Con
tents
International
Germany
German title
English title
IEC 6100033
VDE 08383
IEC
61000415
VDE 0847415
IEC
61000430
VDE 0847430
IEC 6100047
VDE 084747
IEC 610091
VDE 066420
Fehlerstrom-/Differenzstrom-Schutzschalter mit
eingebautem berstromschutz (RCBOs) fr
Hausinstallationen und fr hnliche Anwendungen
Teil1: Allgemeine Anforderungen
Intro
duction
4
5
6
IEC 611313
7
8
IEC 61140
VDE 01401
IEC 613471
VDE 071230
IEC
613472
VDE 0712
Windenergieanlagen Teil1:
Auslegungsanforderungen
IEC 614001
IEC 614391
VDE 06606001
Niederspannungs-Schaltgertekombinationen
Teil1: Allgemeine Festlegungen
IEC 614392
VDE 06606002
Niederspannungs-Schaltgertekombinationen
Teil2: Energie-Schaltgertekombinationen
IEC 614393
VDE 06606003
Niederspannungs-Schaltgertekombinationen
Teil3: Installationsverteiler fr die Bedienung durch
Laien (DBO)
IEC 614396
VDE 06606006
Niederspannungs-Schaltgertekombinationen
Teil6: Schienenverteilersysteme (busways)
IEC 61547
VDE 0875152
13
IEC 618003
VDE 0160103
14
IEC 618691
VDE 041491
IEC 618692
VDE 041492
IEC 618693
VDE 041493
IEC 618694
VDE 041494
IEC 619361
VDE 01011
IEC 62034
VDI 0711400
10
11
12
15
16
17
352
Con
tents
International
Germany
German title
English title
IEC 620401
VDE 0558510
Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgungssysteme
(USV) Teil1: Allgemeine Anforderungen und
Sicherheitsanforderungen
IEC 620402
VDE 0558520
Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgungssysteme
(USV) Teil2: Anforderungen an die
elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit (EMV)
IEC 620403
VDE 0558530
Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgungssysteme
(USV) Teil3: Methoden zum Festlegen der
Leistungs- und Prfungsanforderungen
IEC 62061
VDE 011350
IEC
62271100
VDE 0671100
IEC
62271102
VDE 0671102
IEC
62271103
VDE 0671103
IEC
62271105
VDE 0671105
IEC
62271106
VDE 0671106
IEC
62271200
VDE 0671200
IEC
62271201
VDE 0671201
IEC
62271202
VDE 0671202
IEC 623052
VDE 01853052
IEC 623053
VDE 01853053
IEC 623054
VDE 01853054
IEC 62471
VDE 0837471
IEC 62493
VDE 0848493
IEC 62606
IEC/PAS 62717
Entwurf VDE
066510
Intro
duction
1
2
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
353
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
International
Germany
German title
English title
IEC/TR 61641
VDE 0660500
Beiblatt 2
Niederspannungs-Schaltgertekombinationen in
geschlossener Bauform Leitfaden fr die Prfung
unter Strlichtbogenbedingungen durch einen
inneren Fehler
IEC/TR 62655
VDE 0670-402
IEC/TS
604791
VDE V
01404791
IEC/TS
623511
IEEE 446
ISO 12100
ISO 138491
ISO 14001
ISO 235702
ISO 235703
ISO 23601
Sicherheitskennzeichnung Fluchtwegplne
ISO 3864
ISO 50001
ISO 9001
Qualittsmanagementsysteme Anforderungen
VDE 071013
DIN 41022
DIN 41029
EltBauVO
HOAI 2013
DIN 276
DIN 628012
Stromerzeugungsaggregate Unterbrechungsfreie
Stromversorgung Teil12: Dynamische USVAnlagen mit und ohne HubkolbenVerbrennungsmotor
DIN VDE V
012611
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
354
Con
tents
International
Germany
German title
English title
VDEWRichtlinie
2004
DIN 43880
DIN 40041
Zuverlssigkeit; Begriffe
Dependability; concepts
BSIStandard
1003
VDE 0670402
Entwurf VDE
0662
Ortsfeste Schutzeinrichtungen in
Steckdosenausfhrung zur Schutzpegelerhhung
EMVG
VDI 46021
VDI 46022
Energiemanagement Beispiele
EnEV
Energieeinsparverordnung
VDI 38074
DIN 50357
DIN 50358
DIN V 185991
DIN V 185994
DIN V 1859910
ASR A3.4
Intro
duction
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
355
Con
tents
Intro
duction
International
2
3
4
5
6
7
Germany
German title
English title
BGI 650
Berufsgenossenschaftliche Information fr
Bildschirm- und Broarbeitspltze
VDI 60111
DIN V 5031100
BGR/GUVR
MBO
Musterbauordnung
LBO
Landesbauordnung
ArbstttV
Arbeitsstttenverordnung
MPrfVo
Musterprfverordnung
BetrSichV
Betriebssicherheitsverordnung
BGV
Berufsgenossenschaftliche Vorschriften
MLAR
Muster-Leitungsanlagen-Richtlinie
ArbeitnehmerInnenschutzgesetz
ASR
VDE V 0108100
Sicherheitsbeleuchtungsanlagen
DIN 48441
DIN 48442
DIN 410212
VDEARN 4105
Erzeugungsanlagen am Niederspannungsnetz
Technische Mindestanforderungen fr Anschluss
und Parallelbetrieb von Erzeugungsanlagen am
Niederspannungsnetz
ASchG
8
9
10
VE/NORM
E8002
11
12
13
14
GL 2010
GL 2012
15
16
17
356
Con
tents
Intro
duction
A/D Analog/digital
AC Alternating current
CB Conventional ballast
3
4
CFHC Chlorofluorohydrocarbon
6
7
CO Carbon monoxide
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
357
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
EB Electronic ballast
ECG Electrocardiogram
EEG Electroencephalogram
IR Infrared
EMG Electromyogram
EN European standard
IT Information technology
7
8
9
10
11
FI Fault interrupter
FOC Fibre-optic cable
FT Functional test
12
G
GIS Gas-insulated switchgear
13
14
15
16
17
HV High voltage
358
Con
tents
Intro
duction
PL Performance level
MF Maintenance factor
PV Photovoltaics
PoS Point-of-sale
MV Medium voltage
MVMD Medium-voltage main distribution
N
NaS Sodium-sulphur-battery (based on sodium
sulphide: Na2S)
NE Neutral earthing
NOSPE Low-impedance neutral earthing
NPS Normal power supply
4
5
10
11
12
13
Si-LT Fuse-switch-disconnector
SL Standby light
SPD Surge protection device
SPOF Single point of failure
SPS Safety power supply
SRCD Socket-outlet residual current protection
device
14
15
16
17
359
Con
tents
Intro
duction
TIP
TU Transportation unit
UV Ultraviolet
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
360
Z
ZSI Zone-selective interlocking
Con
tents
Intro
duction
17.4 Bibliography
No.
Year
Published by Authors/Series
Title
2013
2011
Kiank/Fruth
2009
Uptime Institute
2000
2007
2004
2005
A. Held
2013
2005
H. Schau
10
1976
F. Pigler
11
2008
BDEW
12
2003
ZVEI
13
2011
VDE-FNN
14
2007
BDEW
15
2008
BDEW
16
2008
BDEW
17
2013
Frdergesellschaft Windenergie
18
2010
Germanischer Lloyd
19
2012
Germanischer Lloyd
20
2010
M. Wei
21
2009
ZVEI
22
2013
ZVEI
23
2009
24
2013
25
2012
ZVEI
26
2008
licht.de
27
1988
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
361
Con
tents
Intro
duction
2
Conductor cross sections in the Metric and US System
Temperature
Conductor
cross
section
Equivalent
metric CSA
160
320
mm2
mm2
150
in
15 m
AWG or
MCM
305
290
7m
in
8m
Metric cross
sections acc.
to IEC
3m
140
2.620
13
3.310
12
90
4.170
5.260
11
10
80
6.630
8.370
9
8
70
155
10.00
10.550
60
140
16.00
13.300
16.770
6
5
50
21.150
26.670
33.630
3
2
67.430
2/0
95.00
85.030
3/0
120.00
150.00
185.00
15
240.00
300.00
16
400.00
500.00
625.00
107.200
126.640
152.000
4/0
250 MCM
300
202.710
400
253.350
304.000
354.710
405.350
506.710
500
600
700
800
1000
17
362
2m
9m
7m
4m
3m
110
95
30
80
20
65
10
50
32
10
5m
70.00
125
3m
1/0
40
170
20
5
20
10
30
25
40
40
1m
14
53.480
185
2m
13
42.410
50.00
200
1m
35.00
212
M 1 : 100
25.00
100
11 m
14
230
6m
2.080
110
5m
15
6.00
12
245
1.650
4.00
11
260
1.310
2.50
10
120
17
16
1.040
19 AWG
18
1m
0.832
M 1 : 50
1.50
0.653
M 1 : 20
0.75
13 m
275
130
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
Volume
Linear measure
SI unit
1 mm
1 cm
15 m
1m
1 km
Non-metric unit
39.37 mil
dm3
=1l
1 m3
SI unit
61.024 in3 =
0.035
ft3
= 1.057 quart =
ft3
6.29 barrel
Non-metric unit
1 in3
0.0254 mm
SI unit
16.387 cm3
28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3
1 in
2.54 cm = 25.4 mm
1 ft
30.48 cm = 0.305 m
1 yd3
0.765 m3
1 yd
0.914 m
1 fl. oz.
29.574 cm3
1 mile
1.609 km = 1,609 m
1 quart
1 pint
11 m
13 m
1 cm3
3.281 ft = 39.370 in
= 1.094 yd
Non-metric unit
1 mil
Non-metric unit
0.394 in
SI unit
1 gallon
1 barrel
9m
5m
7m
SI unit
Non-metric unit
SI unit
Non-metric unit
1 mm2
0.00155 in2
1 l/s
0.264 gallon/s
1 cm2
0.155 in2
1 l/h
0.0044 gallon/min
1 m2
1 m3/h
4.405 gallon/min =
0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s
1 km2
0.366 mile2
Non-metric unit
1 in2
Non-metric unit
SI unit
ft2
yd2
0.093
m2
0.836
m2
= 929
1 acre
4,046.9 m2
1 mile2
2.59 km2
cm2
SI unit
1 gallon/s
3.785 l/s
1 gallon/min
ft3/s
ft3/min
101.941 m3/h
1.699
10
11
12
13
m3/h
14
15
1m
3m
Square measure
Btu
Btu/h
kgf
lbf
tonf
=
=
=
=
=
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Appendix
363
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Force
Pressure
SI unit
2
3
Non-metric unit
1N
1 kN
0.100 tonf
Non-metric unit
SI unit
1 lbf
4.448 N
1 kgf
9.807 N
1 tonf
9.807 kN
Energy, work, h
SI unit
1 bar
= 105 Pa
= 102 kPa
Non-metric unit
29.53 in Hg =
14.504 psi =
2,088.54 lbf/ft2 =
14.504 lbf/in2 =
0.932 tonf/ft2
6.457 103 tonf/in2
(= 1.02 kgf/cm2)
Non-metric unit
1 Nm
Non-metric unit
8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft
(= 0.102 kgf m)
Non-metric unit
1 lbf ft
8
9
10
1 kg m2
Non-metric unit
23.73 lb ft2
Non-metric unit
11
1 lbf
12
ft2
GD2 = Wr2
J =
4
SI unit
0.04214 kg
m2
Non-metric unit
1 m/s
1 km/h
Non-metric unit
14
Non-metric unit
0.034 bar
0.069 bar
1 hp h
0.
1 lbf/ft2
1 lbf/in2
1 ft lbf
1 tonf/ft2
1 Btu
tonf/in2
kgf/cm2
0.
1.
(=
Electrical power
SI unit
SI unit
1 kW
1.
10
(=
1W
0.
3.
(=
Non-metric unit
1g
0.035 oz
1 kg
2.205 lb = 35.27 oz
1t
Non-metric unit
SI unit
1 oz
28.35 g
1 lb
0.454 kg = 453.6 g
1 sh ton
0.907 t = 907.2 kg
Non-metric unit
1 hp
1 ft lbf/s
0.
76
(=
1 kcal/h
1.
SI unit
1 kg/kWh
Non-metric unit
1 mile/h
1 lb/hp h
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Appendix
1.
0.
1 ft/s
15
364
SI unit
3.
0.
9.
(=
3.
7.
1 Btu/h
SI unit
1.
=
1 psi
Velocity
13
1 kgf m
SI unit
Mass, weight
Moment of inertia
1 kWh
1J
1 in HG
SI unit
1 lbf in
SI unit
Non-metric unit
1.644 lb/hp h
SI unit
0.608 kg/kWh
Con
tents
Intro
duction
Temperature
ric unit
SI unit
SI unit
1 kWh
1J
/ft2 =
n2 =
t2
3 tonf/in2
m2)
1 kgf m
Non-metric unit
SI unit
3.725 107 hp h =
0.738 ft lbf =
9.478 104 Btu
(= 2.388 104 kcal
Non-metric unit
bar =
kgf/cm2
0.070 kgf/cm2
1.093
SI unit
1 hp h
1 ft lbf
1 Btu
0.138 kgf m
1.055 kJ = 1,055.06 J
(= 0.252 kcal)
kgf/cm2
=
/cm2
5 ( 32) =
C
9 F
5
(F + 459.67) = T
9
Note:
Quantity
Symbol
4
5
Unit
Temperature
in degrees Fahrenheit
Temperature
in degrees Celsius
Thermodynamic
temperature in Kelvin
6
7
Non-metric unit
1 m3 = 1,000,000 cm3;
1 cm3 = 1,000 mm3
Non-metric unit
SI unit
1 ft lbf/s
0.746 kW = 745.70 W =
76.040 kgf m/s
(= 1.014 PS)
1 kcal/h
1 Btu/h
1.163 W
0.293 W
1 km = 1,000 m;
1 m = 100 cm = 1,000 mm
1W
1 hp
on
53.6 g
7.2 kg
SI unit
1.341 hp =
101.972 kgf m/s
(= 1.36 PS)
= 2,205 lb
SI unit
Non-metric unit
1 kW
ric unit
5.27 oz
9
+ 32 = F
5 C
9
T 459,67 = F
5
Electrical power
SI unit
Non-metric unit
3.653 106 hp h =
7.233 ft lbf
9
10
1 kW = 1,000 W
11
Btu
Btu/h
kgf
lbf
tonf
12
13
ric unit
ph
14
SI unit
Wh
15
16
17
Totally Integrated Power Appendix
365
Con
tents
Intro
duction
1
2
3
Imprint
Siemens AG
Energy Management
Medium Voltage & Systems
Editor
Siemens AG
Dr. Siegbert Hopf
E-Mail: siegbert.hopf@siemens.com
Technical Support
Translation
Albani translations
uere Brucker Str. 51
D-91052 Erlangen
10
Publishing House
11
Publicis Pixelpark
Ngelsbachstr. 33
D-91052 Erlangen
12
13
14
Image Rights
All images and graphics Siemens AG.
15
2016 Siemens AG
Berlin and Munich
All rights reserved.
16
17
366
Published by
Siemens AG 2016
Energy Management
Medium Voltage & Systems
Mozartstr. 31c
D-91052 Erlangen, Germany
For more information please contact
E-mail: consultant-support.tip@siemens.com
Article No.: EMMS-T10007-00-7600
Printed in Germany
Dispo 27612
08161.0
All rights reserved.
Nominal fee of 3.
All data and circuit examples without engagement.